GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

PMC
Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/
SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/
SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
Ladder Language Programming Manual, GFZ-61863E/15,
Vol. 3 of 4
February 2005
 GFL-002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this
equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment,
a Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation, Inc.

Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Six
CIMPLICITY Helpmate PROMACRO Series Three
CIMPLICITY 90–ADS Logicmaster PowerMotion VersaMax
CIMSTAR Modelmaster PowerTRAC VersaPoint
Field Control Motion Mate Series 90 VersaPro
GEnet PACSystems Series Five VuMaster
Proficy Series One Workmaster

©Copyright 2005 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved
B–61863E/15 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s–1
B–61863E/15 PREFACE

PREFACE

This programming manual describes the method of generating

ladder sequence programs for PMC.
It also describes the operation methods of CRT/MDI and
SYSTEM P series for sequence programming.
Renaming of PMC This manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC
Models models listed in the following table. Note that some models have
been renamed; in the product name column, the old names are
enclosed in parentheses, while the new names appear above the
old names. However, the previous specifications are still applied
to the renamed models. Thus, when using the renamed models,
users should:
• Read the old names shown in this manual as the new names.
• Read the old names appearing on the units as the new names.

Applicable models The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

Product Name Abbreviations Applicable CNC

FANUC PMC–MODEL PA1 PMC–PA1 FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D
FANUC Series 21–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL PA3 PMC–PA3 FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F/H

FANUC Series 21–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA1 (Note 1) PMC–SA1 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A/B

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA1) (PMC–RA1) FANUC Series 20–MODEL A
FANUC Series 21–MODEL B
FANUC Series 20i–MODEL A
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL A
FANUC Series 21i–MODEL A/B
Loader control function (Note 2)

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA2 (Note 1) PMC–SA2 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA2) (PMC–RA2)

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA3 (Note 1) PMC–SA3 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA3) (PMC–RA3) FANUC Series 20–MODEL A
FANUC Series 21–MODEL B
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA5 (Note 1) PMC–SA5 FANUC Series 21i–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA5) (PMC–RA5)

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB (Note 1) PMC–SB FANUC Series 16–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB) (PMC–RB)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB2 (Note 1) PMC–SB2
(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB2) (PMC–RB2)

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB3 (Note 1) PMC–SB3 FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB3) (PMC–RB3) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B

p–1
 PREFACE B–61863E/15

Product Name Abbreviations Applicable CNC

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB4 (Note 1) PMC–SB4 FANUC Series 16–MODEL B
(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB4) (PMC–RB4) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB5 (Note 1) PMC–SB5 FANUC Series 16–MODEL C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB5) (PMC–RB5) FANUC Series 18–MODEL C
FANUC Series 16i–MODEL A
FANUC Series 18i–MODEL A
FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL D/H

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB6 (Note 1) PMC–SB6 FANUC Series 16–MODEL C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB6) (PMC–RB6) FANUC Series 18–MODEL C
FANUC Series 16i–MODEL A
FANUC Series 18i–MODEL A
FANUC Series 21i–MODEL A
FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL D/H

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB7 PMC–SB7 FANUC Series 16i–MODEL B

FANUC Series 18i–MODEL B
FANUC Series 21i–MODEL B

FANUC PMC–MODEL SC (Note 1) PMC–SC FANUC Series 16–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC) (PMC–RC)

FANUC PMC–MODEL SC3 (Note 1) PMC–SC3 FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B/C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC3) (PMC–RC3) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B/C

FANUC PMC–MODEL SC4 (Note 1) PMC–SC4 FANUC Series 16–MODEL B/C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4) (PMC–RC4) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B/C

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PMC–NB FANUC Series 15–MODEL B

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB2 PMC–NB2

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB6 PMC–NB6 FANUC Series 15i–MODEL A

FANUC Series 15i–MODEL B

NOTE
1 These models have been renamed; in the product name
column, the old names are enclosed in parentheses, while
the new names appear above the old names. However, the
previous specifications are still applied to the renamed
models.
Thus, when using the renamed models, users should :
• Read the old names shown in this manual as the new
names.
• Read the old names appearing on the units as the new
names.
2 PMC–SA1 is applied to the loader control side of a CNC
having the loader control function.
The CNC models having the loader control function are as
follows :
FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B/C
FANUC Series 18–MODEL A/B/C
FANUC Series 21–MODEL B
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL A/B

p–2
B–61863E/15 PREFACE

Other manuals However, it does not include all items required for sequence
programming. For those required for sequence programming
refer to the following manuals.

Name of manual Reference items Application

FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D/F Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-PA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62833EN) PMC-PA3
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL H Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-PA3
CONNECTION MANUAL (B–62683EN)
FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB5
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63733EN–1) PMC-SB6
FANUC Series 16/18 Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (B-61803E) PMC-SA2
PMC-SA3
PMC-SB
PMC-SB2
PMC-SB3
PMC-SC
PMC-SC3
FANUC Series 16/18/160/180-MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB3
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62443E-1) PMC-SB4
PMC-SC3
PMC-SC4
FANUC Series 16/18/160/180-MODEL C Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB5
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62753EN-1) PMC-SB6
PMC-SC3
PMC-SC4
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL A Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63003EN-1) PMC-SA5
PMC-SB5
PMC-SB6
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB7
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63523EN-1)
FANUC Series 20–FA/TA Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (B–62173E) PMC-SA3
FANUC Series 21/210–MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–62703EN–1) PMC-SA3
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-NB
BMI INTERFACE PMC-NB2
CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62073E-1)
FANUC Series 15i/150i-MODEL A Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-NB6
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63323EN–1)
FANUC PMC C language programming PMC-SC
C LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING MANUAL PMC-SC3
(B-61863E-1) PMC-SC4
PMC-NB
PMC-NB2

Other application The models covered for reference by this manual, and their
model names abbreviations are:

Product name Abbreviation CNC for

FANUC PMC-MODEL P PMC-P FANUC Power Mate-MODEL C

FANUC PMC-MODEL NA PMC-NA FANUC Series 15-MODEL B

p–3
B–61863E/15 Table of Contents
Volume 1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S–1

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P–I

I. PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM

1. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 SPECIFICATION OF PMCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 SUMMARY OF SPECIFICATION OF LADDER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.3 WHAT IS A SEQUENCE PROGRAM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4 CREATION OF INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS (STEPS 1 TO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.5 CREATION OF LADDER DIAGRAM (STEP 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.6 CODING (STEP 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.7 SEQUENCE PROGRAM ENTRY (STEPS 6, 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CHECK AND WRITE INTO ROM (STEPS 8 TO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.9 STORAGE AND CONTROL OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (STEPS 12 TO 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.1 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.2 REPETITIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3 PRIORITY OF EXECUTION (1ST LEVEL, 2ND LEVEL AND 3RD LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.5 PROCESSING I/O SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.5.1 Input Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5.2 Output Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5.3 I/O Signals to CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5.4 Difference of Status of Signals between 1st Level and 2nd Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.5.5 Notes on Input/Output Signals Over a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.6 INTERLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.7 SEQUENCE PROGRAM PROCESSING TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.8 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MEMORY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

3. ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.1 ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND CNC (PMC´NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2 ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND MACHINE TOOL (PMC´MT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.1 Addresses Between PMC and Machine Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.2 Assignment of I/O Module Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.2.3 I/O Link Connection Unit Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.2.4 I/O Unit MODEL B Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.5 Power Mate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.2.6 FS16i–LA Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

c–1
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

3.2.7 Distribution I/O Connection I/O Module and

Distribution I/O Operator’s Panel I/O Module Assignment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.8 Assignment of Built–in I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.3 INTERNAL RELAY ADDRESSES (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.3.1 Area Managed by the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.4 ADDRESSES FOR MESSAGE SELECTION DISPLAYED ON CRT (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.5 ADDRESS OF COUNTER (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.6 ADDRESS OF KEEP RELAY AND NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL (K) . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.7 ADDRESS OF DATA TABLE (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.8 TIMER ADDRESSES (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.9 LABEL ADDRESSES (JMPB, JMPC, LBL) (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.10 SUBPROGRAM NUMBERS (CALL, CALLU, SP) (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.1 DETAILS OF BASIC INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.1.1 RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.1.2 RD. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.1.3 WRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.1.4 WRT. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.1.5 AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.6 AND. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.7 OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.8 OR. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.9 RD. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.1.10 RD. NOT. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.1.11 AND. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.12 OR. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.13 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.14 RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.1 END1 (1ST LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5.2 END2 (2ND LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.3 END3 (END OF 3RD LEVEL SEQUENCE) (PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6/NB7 ONLY) . . 169
5.4 TMR (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.5 TMRB (FIXED TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
5.6 TMRC (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.7 DEC (DECODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.8 DECB (BINARY DECODING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.9 CTR (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.10 CTRB (FIXED COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.11 CTRC (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.12 ROT (ROTATION CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.13 ROTB (BINARY ROTATION CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.14 COD (CODE CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.15 CODB (BINARY CODE CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
5.16 MOVE (LOGICAL PRODUCT TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

c–2
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

5.17 MOVOR (DATA TRANSFER AFTER LOGICAL SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

5.18 COM (COMMON LINE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.19 COME (COMMON LINE CONTROL END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.20 JMP (JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.21 JMPE (JUMP END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.22 PARI (PARITY CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
5.23 DCNV (DATA CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.24 DCNVB (EXTENDED DATA CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.25 COMP (COMPARISON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5.26 COMPB (COMPARISON BETWEEN BINARY DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.27 COIN (COINCIDENCE CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.28 SFT (SHIFT REGISTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
5.29 DSCH (DATA SEARCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5.30 DSCHB (BINARY DATA SEARCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.31 XMOV (INDEXED DATA TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.32 XMOVB (BINARY INDEX MODIFIER DATA TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.33 ADD (ADDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.34 ADDB (BINARY ADDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.35 SUB (SUBTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.36 SUBB (BINARY SUBTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.37 MUL (MULTIPLICATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.38 MULB (BINARY MULTIPLICATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.39 DIV (DIVISION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.40 DIVB (BINARY DIVISION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.41 NUME (DEFINITION OF CONSTANT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.42 NUMEB (DEFINITION OF BINARY CONSTANTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.43 DISP (MESSAGE DISPLAY) (PMC–SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4 ONLY) . . . . . . . . 268
5.44 DISPB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5.45 EXIN (EXTERNAL DATA INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
5.46 WINDR (READING CNC WINDOW DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.47 WINDW (WRITING CNC WINDOW DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
5.48 ARBITRARY FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5.49 MMCWR (READING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMC–PA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . . 308
5.50 MMCWW (WRITING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMC–PA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . . 310
5.51 MOVB (TRANSFER OF 1 BYTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5.52 MOVW (TRANSFER OF 2 BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
5.53 MOVN (TRANSFER OF AN ARBITRARY NUMBER OF BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.54 MOVD (TRANSFER OF 4 BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.55 DIFU (RISING EDGE DETECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
5.56 DIFD (FALLING EDGE DETECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
5.57 EOR (EXCLUSIVE OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5.58 AND (LOGICAL AND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
5.59 OR (LOGICAL OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
5.60 NOT (LOGICAL NOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
5.61 MMC3 R (MMC–III WINDOW DATA READ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
5.62 MMC3W (MMC–III WINDOW DATA WRITE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
5.63 SPCNT (SPINDLE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

c–3
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

5.64 END (END OF A LADDER PROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

5.65 CALL (CONDITIONAL SUBPROGRAM CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.66 CALLU (UNCONDITIONAL SUBPROGRAM CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
5.67 SP (SUBPROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5.68 SPE (END OF A SUBPROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.69 JMPB (LABEL JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5.70 JMPC (LABEL JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
5.71 LBL (LABEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5.72 AXCTL (AXIS CONTROL BY PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.73 PSGNL (POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5.74 PSGN2 (POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5.75 NOP (NO OPERATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

6.1 TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL, DATA TABLE . 365
6.2 READING AND WRITING OF NONVOLATILE MEMORY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
6.3 PMC DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

7. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

7.1 ADDRESSES, SIGNAL NAMES, COMMENTS, AND LINE NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
7.1.1 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
7.1.2 Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.1.3 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.1.4 Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.2 SYMBOLS USED IN THE LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.3 LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
7.4 INFINITE NUMBER OF RELAY CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

8. MISCELLANEOUS ITEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

9. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

9.1 EXAMPLES OF STRUCTURED PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
9.1.1 Implementation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
9.1.2 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
9.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
9.2 SUBPROGRAMMING AND NESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
9.2.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
9.2.2 Execution Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
9.2.3 Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
9.3 CAUTIONS FOR SUBROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

10. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

10.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
10.2 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

11. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

11.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

c–4
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

11.2 SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

11.3 INTERRUPT PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
11.3.1 Interrupt Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
11.3.2 Input/Output Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
11.3.3 Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
11.3.4 Execution Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
11.3.5 Interrupt Enable/Disable/Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
11.3.6 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
11.4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

II. PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
1.1 FOR MDI UNITS OTHER THAN STANDARD MDI UNITS
(FOR FS20 PMC–SA1 AND SA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
1.2 AUTOMATIC OPERATION WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
1.3 CLEARING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
1.4 LOADING THE STANDARD LADDER (FOR Power Mate–D/F PMC–PA1 AND PA3) . . . . . . . 425
1.5 FS15i PMC–NB6 OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
1.6 FS16i/18i/21i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
1.7 LADDER PASSWORD FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
1.8 PMC OPERATION FOR LOADER CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

2. PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

3. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) . . . . . . 436
3.1 DISPLAYING TITLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
3.2 DISPLAY OF SIGNAL STATUS (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
3.3 ALARM SCREEN (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
3.4 TRACE FUNCTION (TRACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3.4.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3.4.2 Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3.4.3 Starting or Stopping the Trace Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
3.4.4 Trace Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
3.4.5 Automatic Tracing Function at Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
3.5 DISPLAYING THE CONTENTS OF MEMORY (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
3.5.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
3.5.2 Function for Storing Data in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
3.6 FUNCTION FOR DISPLAYING SIGNAL WAVEFORMS (ANALYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.6.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.6.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.6.3 Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
3.6.4 Signal Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
3.6.5 Reading Signals Automatically at Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
3.7 DISPLAYING THE RUNNING STATE OF A USER TASK (USRDGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

c–5
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

3.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING THE CONFIGURATION STATUS OF I/O

DEVICES (IOCHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
3.8.1 I/O Link Connecting Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
3.8.2 I/O Link–II Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
3.9 FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
3.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
3.9.2 Setting/Operation for Enabling Forced Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
3.9.3 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
3.9.4 Modifying the Values of Signals by Forced Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
3.9.5 Setting/Clearing OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

4. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

4.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
4.2 INPUT PMC PARAMETERS FROM MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
4.2.1 Multiple Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
4.3 SETTING AND DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
4.3.1 Timer Screen (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
4.3.2 Counter Screen (COUNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
4.3.3 Keep Relay (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
4.3.4 Data Table (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
4.4 SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
4.4.1 Other Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
4.5 NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

5. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

5.1 LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
5.2 DUMP DISPLAY ON LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
5.3 PARAMETER DISPLAY ON LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
5.3.1 The Value of Functional Instruction Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
5.4 SYMBOL AND COMMENT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
5.5 SEARCH OF SPECIFIED RELAY COIL POINTS IN LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
5.6 STOP OF LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY BY TRIGGER OF SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
5.7 DIVIDING DISPLAY OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
5.8 ON–LINE EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

6. USER PMC SCREEN (PMCMDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

6.1 FOR THE FS16 (PMC–SC, PMC–SC3, OR PMC–SC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
6.2 FOR THE FS15 (PMC–NB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

III. PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
1.1 ABOUT THE FS15i PMC–NB6 PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
1.2 ABOUT THE FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

2. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

2.1 COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

c–6
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

2.2 CONNECTING COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

3. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

4. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . 520

5. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

5.1 SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING TITLE DATA (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
5.1.1 Entering Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
5.1.2 Deleting Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
5.1.3 Editing Character Strings of Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
5.2 SEQUENCE PROGRAM GENERATION (LADDER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
5.2.1 Sequence Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.2.2 Alteration of Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
5.2.3 Insert of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
5.2.4 Delete of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
5.2.5 Search of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
5.2.6 Copying the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
5.2.7 Moving the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
5.2.8 Editing Symbol Data and Comment at Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
5.2.9 Address Change of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
5.3 I/O UNIT ADDRESS SETTING (MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
5.4 SYMBOL DATA SETTING (SYMBOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
5.4.1 Symbol Data and Comment Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
5.4.2 Symbol Data Search (SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
5.4.3 Delete of Symbol Data and Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
5.4.4 Editing Character Strings of Symbol Data and Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
5.4.5 Function for Editing Symbol Data and Comment Data at One Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
5.4.6 Function of Copying Symbol and Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
5.5 MESSAGE DATA SETTING (MESSAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
5.5.1 Message Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
5.5.2 Searching for an Address (SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
5.5.3 Editing a Character String in Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
5.5.4 Input with a Katakana Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.5.5 Copying Message Data (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.5.6 Inputting a Multi–byte Character (D.CHAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.5.7 Displaying Input Code (DSPMOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.6 CLEARING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND CONDENSATION OF
THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
5.6.1 Clearing the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
5.6.2 Compress the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
5.6.3 Clearing the PMC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
5.7 CROSS REFERENCE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
5.7.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
5.7.2 Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

6. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

6.1 START AND STOP OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

c–7
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

6.2 STARTING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

6.3 FORCIBLY STOPPING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

7. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM

AND PMC PARAMETER DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
7.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
7.1.1 C Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
7.2 SET ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
7.3 OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
7.3.1 Transfer to and from a FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
7.3.2 Transfer to and from a FANUC FD Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
7.3.3 Storage to Flash ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
7.3.4 Storage to a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
7.3.5 Data Input to and Output from other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
7.3.6 Setting the Transfer Speed ([SPEED] Soft Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
7.3.7 Transfer to and from a ROM WRITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
7.3.8 Notes on Using an MDI Keyboard without Cursor Keys
(when using the FS20 PMC–MODEL SA1/SA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
7.4 I/O ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
7.5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM COPY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.1 Copy Title Data [CPYTTL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.2 Copy a Ladder Program [CPYLAD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.3 Copy Symbol Data and Comment Data [CPYSYM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.4 Copy Message Data [CPYMSG] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.5 Copy the Sequence Programs [CPYALL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
7.5.6 Copy I/O Module Data [CPYMDL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
7.6 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

8. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING

THE PROGRAM (MONIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
8.1 DISPLAYING THE GDT (GLOBAL DESCRIPTOR TABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
8.1.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
8.1.2 Descriptions of Displayed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
8.2 DISPLAYING THE MEMORY ALLOCATION INFORMATION OF A
USER PROGRAM CODED IN C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
8.2.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
8.2.2 Displayed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
8.3 DEBUGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
8.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
8.3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
8.3.3 Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
8.3.4 Screen for Displaying Traced Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
8.3.5 Enabling Automatic Debugging at Power–on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
8.3.6 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
8.4 LADDER DEBUGGING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
8.4.1 Screen of Ladder Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
8.4.2 Soft Key Menu of Ladder Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

c–8
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

8.4.3 Step Operation [STEP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

8.4.4 Stop Function of Break with Condition [BRKCTL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
8.5 ONLINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
8.5.1 Online Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
8.5.2 Setting of online connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
8.5.2.1 How to set at PMC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
8.5.2.2 How to set at NC parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
8.5.2.3 How to set at NC parameter (Power Mate–D/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
8.5.3 Online Function by Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
8.5.3.1 Setting of Ethernet parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
8.5.3.2 Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
8.5.4 Communication Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
8.5.5 About Connection Log of Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

9. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

10. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

11. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
11.1 SELECTING THE PMC PROGRAMMER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
11.2 SETTING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSTEM PARAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
11.3 EDITING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
11.4 EDITING LADDER MNEMONICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
11.4.1 Starting Ladder Mnemonics Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
11.4.2 Confirming the Ladder Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
11.4.3 Modifying the Ladder Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
11.4.4 Ending Ladder Mnemonics Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
11.5 STARTING AND STOPPING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (RUN/STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
11.6 ERROR MESSAGES (FOR LADDER MNEMONICS EDITING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
11.7 STORING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM INTO FLASH ROM (I/O)
(ONLY FOR THE Power Mate–H AND Power Mate i–D/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
11.8 ERROR DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
11.9 INPUT/OUTPUT LADDER/PMC–PARAMETER BY DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
11.9.1 Input/Output Method to Office Programmer (P–G Mate/Mark II) (Fixed 9600bit/Sec.) . . . . 635
11.9.2 Input/Output Method to FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (Fixed 4800bit/Sec.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
11.10 ON–LINE DEBUGGING FUNCTION (ONLY FOR Power Mate–D/H AND
Power Mate i–D/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
11.10.1 Starting and Stopping the On–line Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
11.11 ERROR LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

IV. PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

2. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

2.1 PMC BASIC MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

c–9
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

2.2 PMC SCREEN TRANSITION AND RELATED SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

3. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND

INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
3.1 TITLE DATA DISPLAY (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
3.2 TITLE DATA EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
3.3 SIGNAL STATUS DISPLAY (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
3.4 ALARM SCREEN (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
3.5 TRACE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
3.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
3.5.2 Setting of Trace Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
3.5.3 Execution of Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
3.5.4 Operation after Execution of Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
3.5.5 Comparison With the Function of FS15–B (PMC–NB/NB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
3.6 I/O LINK MONITOR AND ALLOCATION OF I/O UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
3.6.1 I/O Link Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
3.6.2 I/O Unit Allocation Viewer screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
3.6.3 I/O Unit Allocation Editor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
3.6.3.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
3.6.3.2 Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
3.7 FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
3.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
3.7.1.1 Input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
3.7.2 Operations to Enable the Forced I/O Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
3.7.2.1 Setting of forcing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
3.7.2.2 Setting of override mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
3.7.3 Forced Input/Output Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
3.7.3.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
3.7.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

4. PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

4.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
4.2 METHOD FOR ENTERING PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
4.3 CONTINUOUS DATA ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
4.4 TIMER SCREEN (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
4.5 COUNTER SCREEN (COUNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
4.6 KEEP RELAY SCREEN (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
4.7 DATA TABLE (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

5. SETTING MENU (SETING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

5.1 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING GENERAL SETTINGS (GENERAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
5.2 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING THE SETTING DATA RELATED
TO EDITING AND DEBUGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
5.3 SCREEN FOR SETTING/DISPLAYING ONLINE MONITOR PARAMETERS (ONLINE) . . . . . 694
5.4 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING SETTING DATA RELATED TO C LANGUAGE FUNCTION . . . 696

6. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

6.1 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

c–10
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

6.1.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

6.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
6.1.3 Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
6.1.4 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
6.1.5 Display Format for Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
6.1.6 Functional Instructions of Special Monitor forMat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
6.2 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
6.2.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
6.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
6.2.3 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
6.2.4 Error Messages and Their Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
6.2.5 How to Correct LADDER Program that Never Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
6.3 NET EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
6.3.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
6.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
6.3.3 Functional Instruction List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
6.3.4 Functional Instruction Data Table Editor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
6.3.5 Error Messages and Their Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
6.3.6 Structure of Valid Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
6.4 PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
6.4.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
6.4.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
6.4.3 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
6.5 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
6.5.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
6.5.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
6.5.3 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
6.6 COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
6.6.1 Structures of Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
6.6.2 Operations of Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
6.6.3 How to Pick Up a Ladder Diagram Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
6.7 ADDRESS CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
6.7.1 Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
6.7.2 The Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
6.7.3 Error Messages and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

7. PASSWORD PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

7.1 SPECIFICATIONS OF PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
7.2 PASSWORD AND SWITCHING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
7.2.1 Using One of R–Password and RW–Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
7.2.2 Using Both of R–Password and RW–Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

8. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

AND PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
8.1 I/O SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
8.2 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM MEMORY CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
8.3 MEMORY CARD LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786

c–11
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

8.4 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788

8.5 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLOPPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
8.6 FLOPPY LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
8.7 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . 796
8.8 PORT SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
8.9 I/O SCREEN ERROR MESSAGES (PMC–NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

9. STARTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

10. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

10.1 MENU SCREEN OF MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
10.2 VIEWER/EDITOR OF SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
10.2.1 Viewer Screen of Symbol/Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
10.2.1.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
10.2.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
10.2.2 Editor Screen of Symbol/Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
10.2.2.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
10.2.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
10.2.3 Entry Screen of Symbol/Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
10.2.3.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
10.2.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
10.2.4 Alarm Message and Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
10.3 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF MESSAGE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
10.3.1 Viewer Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
10.3.1.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
10.3.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
10.3.2 Editor Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
10.3.2.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
10.3.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
10.3.3 Entry Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
10.3.3.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
10.3.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
10.3.4 Alarm Message and Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
10.4 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
10.4.1 Viewer Screen of System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
10.4.1.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
10.4.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
10.4.2 Editor Screen of System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
10.4.2.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
10.4.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

c–12
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

Volume 2

V. FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION

1. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
1.1 SCREEN OPERATION FOR PMC–SA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
1.1.1 Structure of Software Key in PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
1.1.2 Addition of System Keep Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
1.2 SCREEN OPERATION FOR PMC–SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
1.2.1 Structure of Software Key in PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
1.2.2 Expansion of Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
1.2.3 Addition of System Keep Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841

2. SETTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

2.1 SWITCHING SCREENS FOR SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
2.2 SETTING SCREEN OF GENERAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
2.3 MULTI–LANGUAGE ALARM/OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY
FUNCTION SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
2.4 CAUTION SCREEN OF THE SETTING PARAMETER FOR
THE SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
2.5 SETTING PARAMETER SCREEN FOR THE SELECTABLE
I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
2.6 PROGRAMMER PROTECTION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
2.6.1 PROGRAMMER ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1: K17.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
2.6.2 HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
2.6.3 EDIT ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K901.6, PMC–SA1: K18.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
2.6.4 HIDE PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.6, PMC–SA1: K19.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
2.6.5 PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.7, PMC–SA1: K19.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
2.6.6 ALLOW PMC STOP (PMC–SB7: K902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
2.6.7 RAM WRITE ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.4, PMC–SA1: K17.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.6.8 DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (PMC–SB7: K900.7, PMC–SA1: K17.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.6.9 IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.6.10 Protection of Each Function of I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.7 EXAMPLE FOR SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
2.8 KEEP RELAYS USED IN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

3. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

3.1 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
3.1.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
3.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
3.1.3 Setting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
3.1.4 Display Format for Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
3.2 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
3.2.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

c–13
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

3.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

3.3 PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
3.3.1 Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
3.3.2 Brief Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
3.3.3 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
3.3.4 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

4. COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

4.1 CALLING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
4.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
4.3 SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
4.4 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

5. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

5.1 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
5.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
5.3 SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
5.4 SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
5.5 NET EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
5.5.1 Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
5.5.2 Screen Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
5.6 STRUCTURE OF VALID NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
5.7 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
5.8 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
5.9 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
5.9.1 Screen Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
5.9.2 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
5.10 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
5.11 NOTE ON PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

6. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

6.1 SIGNAL TRACE SCREEN (INITIAL SCREEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
6.2 SETTING OF TRACE PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
6.3 SETTING OF SAMPLING ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
6.4 EXECUTION OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
6.5 OPERATION AFTER EXECUTION OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
6.6 AUTOMATIC START OF TRACE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
6.7 OUTPUT OF RESULT OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

7. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941

7.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
7.2 EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
7.3 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

8. SYSTEM PARAMETER (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

9. I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

10. ONLINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

10.1 ONLINE SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

c–14
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

10.2 SETTING OF ONLINE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

10.2.1 How to Set at PMC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
10.2.2 Setting of Online Connection by NC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
10.3 ONLINE FUNCTION BY ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
10.3.1 Setting of Ethernet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
10.3.2 Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
10.4 COMMUNICATION STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
10.5 ABOUT CONNECTION LOG OF ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

VI. STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
1.1 STEP SEQUENCE METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
1.2 GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
1.3 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

2.1 TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
2.2 EXECUTION OF STEP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984

3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . 988

3.1 STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
3.2 INITIAL STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
3.3 TRANSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
3.4 DIVERGENCE OF SELECTIVE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
3.5 CONVERGENCE OF SELECTIVE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
3.6 DIVERGENCE OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
3.7 CONVERGENCE OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
3.8 JUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
3.9 LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
3.10 BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
3.11 INITIAL BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
3.12 END OF BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

4. EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

4.1 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION TRSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
4.2 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001

5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

5.1 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
5.2 GENERAL RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
5.3 EXCLUSIVE CONTROL FOR FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

6. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

6.1 DISPLAYING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

c–15
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

6.1.1 Program Configuration List (Main Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

6.1.2 Step Sequence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
6.1.3 Ladder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
6.2 TIMER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
6.2.1 Time Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
6.2.2 Monitoring Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
6.3 MONITOR TIME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
6.4 EDITING FUNCTION OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
6.4.1 Program Configuration List (Main Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
6.4.2 Step Sequence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
6.4.3 Ladder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
6.5 CORRESPONDING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
6.6 COMPATIBILITY OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

7.1 DISPLAYING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
7.1.1 Hierarchy of Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
7.1.2 Program List Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
7.1.3 Step Sequence Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
7.1.3.1 Structure of screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
7.1.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
7.1.3.3 Setting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
7.1.4 Subprogram List Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
7.1.4.1 Detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
7.1.4.2 Brief screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
7.1.4.3 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
7.1.4.4 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
7.1.5 Ladder Diagram Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
7.1.6 Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
7.2 DISPLAYING RUN STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
7.2.1 Step Sequence State Screen (Whole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
7.2.1.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
7.2.2 Step Sequence State Screen (Subprogram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
7.2.2.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
7.3 TIME MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
7.3.1 Time Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
7.3.2 Time Monitor Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
7.4 EDITING FUNCTION OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

VII. PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055

2. FUNCTIONS OF PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056

3. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058

3.1 COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

c–16
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

3.2 CONNECTIONS OF UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

3.3 KEYBOARD OF SYSTEM P SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
3.3.1 LOAD Key (System Program Loading Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
3.3.2 F Keys (F1 to F0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
3.3.3 R Keys (R0 to R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
3.3.4 Data Keys and Screen Scroll Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
3.4 SETTING OF I/O DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

4. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
4.2 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.1 System Floppy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.2 Limitations with the SYSTEM P Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.3 Loading of Floppy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.4 FANUC LADDER System Floppy Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
4.2.5 Programmer Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
4.2.6 Parameter Setting and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
4.3 PROGRAM EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
4.3.1 Data Display and Setting (Title, Symbol, Ladder Program, Comment,
Message, I/O Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
4.3.2 Programming from Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
4.3.3 Alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
4.3.4 Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
4.3.5 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
4.3.6 Location Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
4.3.7 Display of Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
4.3.8 Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
4.3.9 Editing end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
4.4 INPUT OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
4.4.1 Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
4.4.2 ROM Format Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
4.5 OUTPUT OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
4.5.1 Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
4.5.2 Paper Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
4.5.3 ROM Format Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
4.6 COLLATION OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
4.6.1 Collation of Source Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
4.6.2 ROM Format Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
4.7 DELETION OF PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
4.8 SPECIAL USES OF THE R3 KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
4.9 DIRECT EDITING BY LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.2 Limitations in SYSTEM P Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.3 Selection of Program Menu by Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.4 Sequence Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
4.9.5 Substitution of Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
4.9.6 Additions to Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113

c–17
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

4.9.7 Deleting a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116

4.9.8 Searching a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
4.9.9 Copying a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
4.9.10 Moving a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
4.9.11 Symbol Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
4.9.12 Compressed Input by [COMAND] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
4.9.13 Ending Edit of a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
4.10 INPUT/OUTPUT OF LADDER PROGRAM WITH P–G AND FLOPPY
CASSETTE/FA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.2 Setting I/O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.3 Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.4 Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
4.10.5 Program Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

5.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
5.2 CONFIGURATION OF COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
5.3 FDLIST COMMAND — FILE ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
5.4 RENAME COMMAND — FILE ATTRIBUTE CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
5.5 SCRATCH COMMAND — DELETION OF FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
5.6 CONDENSE COMMAND — RELEASE OF DELETED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
5.7 REMOVE COMMAND — FILE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

APPENDIX
A. ERROR CODES LIST (FOR FANUC LADDER P–G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139

B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/

SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
B.1 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
B.2 LOW–SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH–SPEED RESPONSE OF WINDOW FUNCTION . . . . 1143
B.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
B.4 FORMATS AND DETAILS OF CONTROL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
B.4.1 Reading CNC System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
B.4.2 Reading a Tool Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
B.4.3 Writing a Tool Offset (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
B.4.4 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (not Supported by the Power Mate–D or –F) . . . 1154
B.4.5 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value(:Low–speed Response)
(not Supported by the Power Mate–D or –F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
B.4.6 Reading a Parameter (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
B.4.7 Writing a Parameter (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
B.4.8 Reading Setting Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
B.4.9 Writing Setting Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
B.4.10 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
B.4.11 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

c–18
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

B.4.12 Reading the CNC Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171

B.4.13 Reading the Current Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
B.4.14 Reading the Current Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
B.4.15 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
B.4.16 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
B.4.17 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
B.4.18 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Position of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes . . . . 1186
B.4.19 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
B.4.20 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
B.4.21 Reading Modal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
B.4.22 Reading Diagnosis Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
B.4.23 Reading A/D Conversion Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
B.4.24 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
B.4.25 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
B.4.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
B.4.27 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life)
(not Supported by the Power Mate D, –F, or Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
B.4.28 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
B.4.29 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No. (1): Tool No.) . . . . 1213
B.4.30 Reading Tool Life Management Data
(Tool Length Compensation No. (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
B.4.31 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No. (1): Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . 1217
B.4.32 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No. (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . 1219
B.4.33 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1) : Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
B.4.34 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
B.4.35 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
B.4.36 Reading the Actual Spindle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
B.4.37 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (:Low–speed Response)
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
B.4.38 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (not available for Power Mate–F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
B.4.39 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1233
B.4.40 Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
B.4.41 Reading a Parameter (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
B.4.42 Reading Set Data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
B.4.43 Reading Diagnosis Data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
B.4.44 Reading a Character String of the CNC Program Being Executed in the Buffer . . . . . . . . . 1241
B.4.45 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
B.4.46 Reading the Remaining Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
B.4.47 Reading CNC Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
B.4.48 Reading Value of the P–code Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
B.4.49 Writing Value of the P–code Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
B.4.50 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
B.4.51 Registering the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . 1255
B.4.52 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . 1257
B.4.53 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (:Low–speed Response) . . 1259
B.4.54 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type)
(:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
B.4.55 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number (1) :
Tool Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263

c–19
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

B.4.56 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number (2) :
Tool Operation Sequence Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
B.4.57 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number (1) :
Tool Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
B.4.58 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number (2) :
Tool Operation Sequence Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
B.4.59 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Condition (1) :
Tool Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
B.4.60 Writing the Tool Management Data (Tool Condition (2) :
Tool Operation Sequence Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
B.4.61 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1275
B.4.62 Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
B.4.63 Reading the Current Program Number (8–digit Program Numbers)
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
B.4.64 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
B.4.65 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
B.4.66 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Diameter Offset Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
B.4.67 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
B.4.68 Writing (Registering) Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number)
(:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
B.4.69 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number 1)
(:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
B.4.70 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Radius Offset Number 1)
(:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
B.4.71 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . 1298
B.4.72 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
B.4.73 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Statistical Calculation Results) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
B.4.74 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Store Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
B.4.75 Specifying the Number of the Program for I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
B.4.76 Preset of relative coordinate (:Low–speed response)
(not available for Power Mate and Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
B.4.77 Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool group) (:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . 1320
B.4.78 Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool data) (:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . 1322
B.4.79 Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool life counter and Tool condition)
(:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
B.4.80 Writing the Tool life Management Data (Arbitrary group number)
(:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
B.4.81 Writing the Tool life Management Data (Remaining tool life) (:Low–speed response) . . . 1328
B.4.82 Reading the Current Screen Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
B.4.83 Reading Detailed Alarm Information (:Low–speed type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
B.4.84 Reading the Servo Data of Control Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
B.4.85 Exchange of Tool Management Data Number in the Magazine Management Table
(:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
B.4.86 Search of Empty Pot (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
B.4.87 New–register of a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
B.4.88 Writing a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
B.4.89 Deletion of a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
B.4.90 Reading a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
B.4.91 Writing Each Tool Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
B.4.92 Search of Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364

c–20
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

B.4.93 Shift of Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366

C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368

C.1 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
C.2 LOW–SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH–SPEED RESPONSE OF WINDOW FUNCTION . . . . 1370
C.2.1 Functional Instruction WINDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
C.2.2 Functional Instruction WINDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
C.3 FORMAT AND DETAILS OF THE CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDR FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
C.3.1 Reading a Tool Offset (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
C.3.2 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
C.3.3 Reading a Parameter (Setting Data) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
C.3.4 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
C.3.5 Reading the CNC Alarm Status (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
C.3.6 Reading the Current Program Number (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
C.3.7 Reading the Current Sequence Number (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
C.3.8 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
C.3.9 Reading the Absolute Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
C.3.10 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
C.3.11 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Position of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes
(Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
C.3.12 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
C.3.13 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
C.3.14 Reading Modal Data (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
C.3.15 Reading Diagnosis Data (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
C.3.16 Reading A/D Conversion Data for the Feed Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
C.3.17 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) (Low–speed Response) . . 1397
C.3.18 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups)
(Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
C.3.19 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . 1398
C.3.20 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
C.3.21 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . 1399
C.3.22 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) (Low–speed Response) . . 1400
C.3.23 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No.1)
(Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
C.3.24 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No.2)
(Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
C.3.25 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No.1)
(Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
C.3.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No.2)
(Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
C.3.27 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1405
C.3.28 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 2) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1406
C.3.29 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
C.3.30 Reading Clock Data (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
C.3.31 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
C.3.32 Reading the Remaining Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
C.3.33 Reading an Estimate Disturbance Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410

c–21
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

C.3.34Reading the Machining Time (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411

C.3.35Reading the Load Current (A/D Conversion Data) for the Spindle Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
C.3.36Reading the Tool Offset Data According to the Specified Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
C.3.37Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Numbers) (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . 1414
C.3.38Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1)
(Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
C.3.39 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1)
(Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
C.3.40 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . 1417
C.3.41 Reading Real Parameters (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
C.3.42 Reading the actual Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes. . . . . . . . 1419
C.3.43 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Statistical Calculation Results). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
C.3.44 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Store Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
C.3.45 Reading detailed information of CNC alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
C.4 FORMAT AND DETAILS OF THE CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDW FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
C.4.1 Writing a Tool Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
C.4.2 Writing a Parameter (Setting Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
C.4.3 Writing a Custom Macro Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
C.4.4 Writing a Data on the Program Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
C.4.5 Writing the Torque Limit Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
C.4.6 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
C.4.7 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
C.4.8 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
C.4.9 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
C.4.10 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . 1436
C.4.11 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 2) . . . . . . . . 1436
C.4.12 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
C.4.13 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
C.4.14 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
C.4.15 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
C.4.16 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
C.4.17 Writing the Tool Offset Data According to the Specified Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
C.4.18 Writing the Superposition Move Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
C.4.19 Writing the Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
C.4.20 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
C.4.21 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
C.4.22 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
C.4.23 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
C.4.24 Writing Real Parameters (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448

D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449

D.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
D.2 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
D.2.1 Transfer Between Data Area and Non–volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
D.2.2 Reading of the Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
D.2.3 Reading and Writing the Laser Command Data and Laser Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456

E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459

E.1 READING THE WIRE DIAMETER OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460

c–22
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

E.2 WRITING THE WIRE DIAMETER OFFSET (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462

E.3 READING THE PARAMETER (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
E.4 WRITING THE PARAMETER (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
E.5 READING SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
E.6 WRITING SETTING DATA (LOW–SPEED TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
E.7 READING THE CNC ALARM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
E.8 READING MODEL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
E.9 READING MACHINING DISTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480
E.10 READING THE MEASURED POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
E.11 WRITING THE MEASURED POINT (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483

F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484

F.1 READING OF TOOL SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
F.1.1 Data Number, Data Attribute, Data Length, Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487
F.2 WRITING OF TOOL SETTING DATA (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
F.3 READING TOOL SETTING DATA BY SPECIFYING TOOL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
F.4 OTHER WINDOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493

G. SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION

(FROM THE PMC–MODEL L/M TO THE PMC–MODEL SB/SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
G.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
G.2 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
G.3 CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
G.4 MODIFYING THE CONVERTED SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
G.4.1 Modification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496

H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16,

FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
H.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
H.2 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
H.2.1 Connecting the I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
H.2.2 Connecting the I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
H.3 SIGNALS FOR CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.1 Emergency Stop Signal (*ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.2 Override Signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and Program Protect Key Signal (KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.3 Key Switch Signals (Xn, Xn+2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.4 LED Signals (Ym) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
H.4 SPECIFYING ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
H.4.1 Parameter Menu (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
H.4.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505

I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507

I.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
I.2 COMPATIBILITY WITH CNC BASIC SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
I.3 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI OR PDP/MDI) [LADDER EDITING FUNCTION] . . . . . . . 1509
I.3.1 Component Units and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509

c–23
 Table of contents B–61863E/15

I.3.1.1 Component units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510

I.3.1.2 Connection of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
I.3.1.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
I.3.2 Specification and Display of System Parameters (SYSPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
I.3.3 Condense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
I.4 SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF SOFT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514

J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515

J.1 FANUC LADDER, FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADDER–III,
LADDER EDITING PACKAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516
J.2 FANUC LADDER (SYSTEM P SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518

K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520

K.1 OUTLINE OF LEVELED UP CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
K.2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
K.2.1 CNC ³ Offline Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
K.2.2 Offline Programmer ³ CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
K.2.3 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525
K.3 NB/NB2 DATA COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
K.3.1 Data Transfer Between NB (4047 Series) and FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
K.3.2 Data Transfer Between NB/NB2 (4048 Series) and FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
K.3.3 Data Transfer Between NB (4047 Series) and NB (4048 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528

L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS . . . . . 1529

L.1 MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS FROM Power Mate–D/H TO Power Mate i–D/H . . . 1530
L.2 MIGRATION FROM THE PMC–NB/NB2 TO THE PMC–NB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532
L.3 MIGRATION FROM THE PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 TO THE PMC–SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
L.3.1 Compatibility of PMCs for Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
L.3.2 PMC Parameter Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L.3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L.3.2.2 Format for PMC–MODEL SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L.3.2.3 Format for PMC–MODEL SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
L.3.2.4 The difference between PMC–SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 and PMC–SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
L.4 MIGRATION FROM THE Series 0 AND Series 21–B TO Series 0i–A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
L.4.1 Compatible With Series 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
L.4.2 Compatibility With Series 21–MODEL B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
L.4.3 Limited Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
L.5 COMPATIBILITY OF PMC BETWEEN Series15i–MODEL A AND B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551

M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552

M.1 ALARM MESSAGE (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/
SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
M.2 ALARM MESSAGE (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
M.3 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
M.4 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (C LANGUAGE FUNCTION FOR PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . 1567
M.5 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SB5/SB6/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568

c–24
B–61863E/15 Table of contents

M.6 PMC SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570

N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572

O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576

O.1 WHILE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
O.2 DO–WHILE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
O.3 FOR STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581
O.4 IF ELSE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
O.5 SWITCH STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585

P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND SPECIAL

CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588

c–25
VI. STEP SEQUENCE
FUNCTION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL

1 GENERAL

967
1. GENERAL STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

1.1 The ladder method is most often used for programming the sequence
control governed by a programmable controller. This method, shown in
STEP SEQUENCE Fig.1.1(a) , was derived from relay-panel control circuits. Since it has
METHOD been in use for years, many sequence control engineers are already
familiar with it. This method is also used in PMC sequence
programming.

Fig. 1.1 (a) Ladder method

The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC for a CNC
system, the larger and the more complicated the sequence program
becomes. A large-scale system requires a larger program and a greater
number of processes, making it hard for the ladder method to control the
overall process. This is because the ladder method does not describe the
order of control. While the ladder method is suitable for describing partial
control, it is hard to apply it to the description of the flow of control
overall.
To overcome this problem, structured programming has been introduced
into sequence control. A PMC that supports the subprogram function
enables the use of modular programs. As shown in Fig.1.1(b), a
large-scale program is divided into subprograms for each function,
simplifying the unit of processing. Since the programmer determines
how to divide the main program into subprograms and the control flow
used to call the subprograms, however, the programs are not necessarily
easy-to-understand by other programmers.

CALL
CALL

Subprogram
Subprogram

Fig. 1.1 (b) Module method

968
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL

Given these conditions, a step sequence method has been created to

describe programs structurally. It is well-suited to the control of entire
processes and provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the
process. The step sequence programming features the direct
representation of the control flow on a flow chart, as shown in Fig.1.1(c).
Each block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the ladder
method. The entire program is then created by combining these
subprograms.

Step 1

Transition

Step 2

Subprogram of ladder diagram

Drawing flow

Fig. 1.1(c) Step sequence method

The step sequence method has the following features:
(1) Increased programming efficiency
D Since the flow of processes can be programmed directly, simple,
correct programming is enabled, reducing the time required for
programming.
D Even for complicated control, programming proceeds from the main
flow to detailed flow in each process, creating a structured, top-down
program, which is easy-to-understand by persons other than the
original creator.
D Structured modules can be used again easily.
(2) Easy debugging and maintenance
D Graphical display enables the operator to easily understand the
execution state of a program visually.
D Erroneous steps in a program can be found easily.
D A part of a program can be easily modified.
(3) High-speed program
D Since only the subprograms required for a certain process are
executed, the cycle time is reduced.
(4) Transition from ladder programs
D Since steps and transitions consist of conventional ladder programs,
conventional ladder programs can be converted to new step sequence
programs, without discarding ladder-program resources.
In step sequence programming, a sequence control program is divided
into two types of subprograms, steps and transitions. Steps describe
processes. Transitions connect steps and determine whether the transition
conditions from one step to another evaluate true. As shown in Fig.1.1(d),
a step sequence program is described using graphical symbols.

969
1. GENERAL STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

[ ] Step A Starts execution. Waits for machining request.

(Process 1)

Transition B Machining request?

±When machining is requested
Step C Holds a workpiece on the pallet.
(Process 2)
Transition D Loading completed?
±Once loading has been completed
Step E Machines the workpiece. (Process 3)

Transition F Machiningcompleted?
±Once machining has been completed
Step G Unloads the workpiece to the pallet.
(Process 4)
Transition H Unloadingcompleted?
±Once unloading has been completed
Step I Moves the pallet. (Process 5)

Fig. 1.1 (d) Example of machining the workpiece

As shown in this example, the program flow from process 1 through
process 5 is expressed visually. Detailed programs related to the
movements performed aspart of each process, and the signals used for
determining whether transition conditions for proceeding to the next step
are satisfied, are not described here. To program complicated control
flows, many other functions are supported, such as divergence, jump, and
nesting functions. The details of these functions are described later.
Step sequence programming is suitable for creating programs which
control processes sequentially. Programs used for controlling a unit
which operates according to a certain sequence, such as a loader, ATC, and
other peripheral units, are best suited to step sequence programming. For
programs which control units with no particular sequence, such as that of
the operator’s panel which is always monitoring the emergency stop
signal or mode signals, however, are not well-suited to step sequence
programming. The PMC supports the advantages of both methods, ladder
and step sequence programming, by calling subprograms written
according to a step sequence and those written as a ladder, from the main
program.

970
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL

1.2 This manual uses the graphical symbols listed in Table 1.2 to describe step
sequence flowcharts. Depending on the character font being used, the
GRAPHICAL actually displayed symbols may differ slightly from those listed here.
SYMBOLS These graphical symbols are described in the subsequent chapters.

Table 1.2 List of graphical symbols

Display
Display of
Contents programming FANUC LADDER
manual CNC Device of Personal
Computer
Step
Sn Sn Sn

Initial
Step [ ] Sn [ ] Sn [ ] Sn

Transition
Pn Pn Pn

Divergence of
Selective
Sequence

Convergence
of
Selective
Sequence

Divergence of
Simultaneous
Sequence

Convergence
of
Simultaneous
Sequence

Jump
→ Ln > Ln > Ln
Label
Ln < Ln < Ln
→

Block Step
] Sn ] Sn ] Sn

Initial
Block Step [ ] Sn [ ] Sn
[ ] Sn

End of
Block Step

971
1. GENERAL STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

1.3 Follow the procedure below to create a step sequence program. Use a
personal computer on which the FANUC LADDER software package is
PROGRAMMING installed to code (edit) a program. Use a CNC to execute, debug and
correct the ladder subprogram.
(1) Create step sequence program (editing)
(2) Create a subprogram of ladder diagram (editing)
(3) Compile
(4) Transfer to the CNC device (with the memory card or RS232C)
(5) Write to the FlashROM
(6) Execute
(7) Diagnosis and debugging
(8) Correct a subprogram of ladder diagram (editing)

RS232C
Personal CNC device
Computer
PMC- SB4/SB6/
Memory SC4/NB2
card ±
FANUC LADDER
(5) Write to the FlashROM
software (4) Transfer to the FlashROM
CNC device

(1) Create Step Sequence program (6) Execute

(editing) (7) Diagnosis and debugging
(2) Create a subprogram of ladder (8) Correct a subprogram of ladder diagram (editing)
diagram (editing)
(3) Compile

Fig. 1.3 Programming to create a program

Table1.3 lists the step sequence functions supported by a personal
computer (on which the FANUC LADDER software package is
installed) and CNC.

972
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL

Table 1.3 Step sequence functions

Ę : usable
Personal computer
PMC-SB4/
Functions SB6 PMC-SC4 PMC-NB2 FANUC FANUC FANUC
LADDER LADDER II LADDER III
Display and edit of a program
 Display of subprogram list Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
 Create a new subprogram Ę Ę Ę
 Delete a subprogram Ę Ę Ę
 Edit a subprogram of Step Sequence form Ę Ę Ę
 Edit a subprogram of ladder diagram Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
 Compile Ę Ę Ę
 Decompile Ę Ę Ę

Input and output

 Input and output with a memory card Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
 Input and output with RS232C Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
 Write to a FlashROM Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę

Execution of program
 execution of a ladder diagram Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
 execution of Step Sequence program Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę

Diagnosis and debugging (note1)

 Diagnosis of Step Sequence program Ę Ę Ę
 Diagnosis of a ladder diagram Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
 Set and display a monitoring timer Ę Ę Ę

NOTE
While step sequence functions are being used, some of the
diagnosis and debug functions supported by the ladder
method cannot be used. For details, see 6.5 (Support
Functions).

973
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

2 STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

974
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

2.1 A step sequence program is created using a variety of graphical symbols,

as shown in Fig. 2.1 (a). The main terms used in the step sequence are
TERMINOLOGY described below.

(Block)
[ ] S1 (Initial Step)

P100 (Transition)

S2 (Step)

P101 (Transition)

L1 (Label)
S3

(Divergence of Selective Sequence)

(Divergence of
Simultaneous
Sequence)

(Convergence of
Simultaneous
Sequence)

(Convergence of Selective Sequence)

] S10 (Block Step)

L1 (Jump)

Fig. 2.1 (a) Step sequence elements

975
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

(1) Step

Sn
(Pm)

A step indicates a process, which is the basic processing unit in a step

sequence program. In a step, specify the S address (Sn), which is a
step number, and P address (Pm), which indicates a subprogram
(action program) specifying the details of processing in each step.
(2) Step state transition
When a step sequence program is executed, the process proceeds as
program processing advances, the state of each step changs
accordingly. Each step can assume any of the logical states listed in
Table 2.1, its state changes as shown in Fig. 2.1 (b). Activation refers
to the changing of a step from the inactive state to the active state.
Inactivation refers to the changing of a step from the active state to
the inactive state.

Table 2.1 Step state

State Processing Display

Active Execution Activated step.
The action program (subprogram) is being Sn
executed.

Inactive Transition Transition from execution to halt.

to halt The action program (subprogram) is executed
once only, then the step automatically transits to
halt.
Sn
Halt Not activated state.
The action program (subprogram) has not yet
been executed.

Inactivate (halt status)

Activate (active status)

Inactivate (transition to halt)

Fig. 2.1 (b) Step state transition

976
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

(3) Transition

Pn

A transition denotes the transition conditions. When these evaluate

true, the step of the corresponding state changes from the inactive to
active state or vice the reverse. Specify the P address (Pn), which
indicates a subprogram describing the transition conditions in detail.
As shown in Fig. 2.1 (c), step S2 changes its state from inactive to
active when the conditions described in transition P10 evaluate true,
while step S2 changes its state from active to inactive when the
conditions described in transition P20 evaluate true.

Executing step1 Executing step2 Executing step3

S1 (step 1) S1 (step1) S1 (step1)

P10 (Condition P10 P10

is true)
S2 (step2) S2 (step2) S2 (step2)

P20 P20 (Condition P20

is true)

S3 (step3) S3 (step3) S3 (step3)

Fig. 2.1 (c) Transition of step state by the transition

Note that the step immediately before a transition must be active in
order to switch the next step from inactive to active when the
conditions specified in the transition evaluate true. As shown in
Fig. 2.1 (d), step S3 does not change to the active state, even when
transition P20 evaluates true, if step S1 is active and step S2 is
inactive. An active state passes from a certain step to the next step
when the corresponding transition conditions evaluate true, the
execution of the step sequence program advancing one step.

Executing step1 Executing step1

S1 (step1) S1 (step1)

P10 P10

S2 (step2) S2 (step2)

P20 (Condition P20

is true)
S3 (step3) S3 (step3)

Fig. 2.1 (d) Transition of step state by transition

977
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

(4) Initial Step

[ ] Sn
(Pm)

While a normal step can be activated by a transition, the initial step

is activated automatically when execution of the program starts, as
shown in Fig. 2.1 (e).

Stopping program (STOP) Executing program (RUN)

[ ] S1 (step1) [ ] S1 (step1)

P10 P10

S2 (step2) S2 (step2)

P20 P20

S3 (step3) S3 (step3)

Fig. 2.1 (e) Activate of initial step

Although the initial step, which is usually executed first, is often
placed at the top of a program, it can also be specified at some point
within a program. It is always activated first. After being deactivated
once, it can be subsequently be activated again. In this case, it acts
in the same way as a normal step.

978
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

(5) Divergence and Convergence of Selective Sequence

To describe a complicated sequence, selective sequences can be used.
A selective sequence offers multiple choices, from among which the
condition becomes true first activates the corresponding step, as
shown in Fig. 2.1 (f). The divergent paths join to generate the mai
sequence.

S1
(Divergence of selective sequence)
P21 P22 P23
S21 S22 S23

(Convergence of selective sequence)

When transition P21 When transition P22

evaluates true evaluates true
± ±

S1 S2

(true) (true)
S21 S22 S23 S21 S22 S23

Fig. 2.1 (f) Selective sequence

979
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

(6) Divergence and Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence

A Simultaneous sequence can be used to execute multiple processes
simultaneously. In a Simultaneous sequence, as shown in Fig. 2.1 (g),
one transition activates multiple steps. The activated multiple steps
are executed independently. Once all steps along the multiple paths
have been completed, the divergent paths join to generate the main
sequence.

S1
P10
(Divergence of
simultaneous
sequence)
S21 S22 S23

S31 S32 S33

(Convergence of
simultaneous
sequence)
S4

When transition P10

evaluates true
±

S1
P10 (true)

S21 S22 S23

S31 S32 S33

S4

Fig. 2.1(g) Simultaneous sequence

980
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

(7) Jump and Label

The jump function is used to describe a non–serial sequence, such as
a repeated loop. As shown in Fig. 2.1 (h), when a jump designation
is activated, the sequence jumps to the step having the corresponding
jump destination label, after which that step is activated. To specify
a label number, the L address is used in the same way as a jump
instruction in ladder programming. A jump can be made to a previous
or subsequent step.

Executing step3 Executing step1

L1 L1 (Label)
S1 (step1) S1 (step1)

P10 P10

S2 (step2) S2 (step2)

P20 P20

S3 (step3) S3 (step3)

P30 (Condition ³³³ P30

is true)

L1 (Jump) L1

Fig. 2.1 (h) Jump and Label

(8) Block
A block refers to a group of consecutive steps and transitions. A block
can be a step sequence program. The more complicated the sequence
becomes, the larger and more complex the block is. A program can
be divided into multiple blocks in the same way as for subprograms
in ladder programming, based on the concept of modular
programming. Each block is identified by a P address, which
corresponds to the subprogram number in ladder programming.
A block is executed as the main program in a step sequence, or called
from another step sequence program as a subprogram.

Block (P1) Block (P2)

[ ] [ ]

Fig. 2.1 (i) Block

981
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

(9) Calling block

To execute a block as the main program in a step sequence, call the
block with the CALLU (SUB 66) or CALL (SUB65) instruction in
the same way as for ladder subprogram calling from the second level
ladder program.

Ladder (Second level) Block2 (P2)

[ ]

CALLU P2

CALLU P3

Block3 (P3)

[ ]

Fig. 2.1 (j) Calling block

(10) Block step (calling step sequence program)

] Sn
(Pm)

To call a block from the step sequence program as a subprogram,

specify a block step in the step sequence program which calls the
block, as shown in Fig. 2.1 (k). This is called bloc nesting.

Block (P1) Block (P2)

[ ] S1 [ ] S231

S232
S21 S22 ] S23
(P2) S233

S3

Fig. 2.1 (k) Block nesting

The program shown in Fig. 2.1 (k) is equivalent to in Fig. 2.1 (l).
which does not use a block step.

982
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

Block (P1)

[ ] S1

S21 S22 S231

S232

S233

S3

Fig. 2.1 (l) Program without block step

(11)End of block step

Use an end block step to terminate nested–block–step calling and to

return to the calling sequence.

983
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

2.2
EXECUTION OF STEP
SEQUENCE
Editing Compile Executing
(source program) (ROM format program)

First level
(Ladder diagram)

END1 (SUB 1) function

Second level
(Ladder diagram) CALL
CALL
END2 (SUB 2) function

Third level
(Ladder diagram)

END3 (SUB 48) function

Subprogram P1
(Ladder diagram)

[ ] Subprogram P2
(Step sequence)

Subprogram P3
(Ladder diagram)

[ ] Subprogram P4
(Step Sequence)

S
S
Subprogram Pn

END (SUB 64) function

Fig. 2.2 (a) Structure of program

984
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

In the step sequence method, a program is created (edited) in units of

subprograms. The edited source program is compiled andconverted to an
executable ROM–format program, thenlinked, as shown in Fig. 2.2 (a).
A ROM–format program is a kind of a modular program, created using
conventional subprograms. A step sequence block is also a type of a
subprogram. Step sequence blocks are linked to the end of the first level
to third level ladder programs, together with other ladder subprograms.
In the same way as in the ladder method, a program is activated at certain
intervals, namely every 8 ms, as shown in Fig. 2.2 (b). The first level and
second level ladders are executed for a certain period (T ms), then the third
level ladder is executed for the remaining time. The period in which the
first level and second level ladders are executed varies with the PMC
model and the setting of the system parameter (LADDER EXEC).
Whether the third level ladder can be used depends on the PMC model.

tn–8 tn+0 tn+8 tn+16

8msec 8msec 8msec

T msec T msec T msec

First level

Second level

°division °division °finished

Third level
(depends on
the PMC model)

Fig. 2.2 (b) Execution of program cyclically

After the first level ladder has been executed, the second level ladder i
executed for the remaining time. If the second level ladder cannot be fully
executed within one execution period, it is suspended part–way, with the
remainder being executed in the nextperiod. This type of execution is
called divided execution. Where the second level ladder is divided varies
with the execution time of the first level ladder and that of the executed
instructions of the second level ladder. Divided execution is divided into
two types, divided system and undivided system. In the divided system,
the position where the second level ladder is divided is determined in
advance, a divided instruction code being inserted at that position. In the
undivided system, in contrast, where the second level ladder is divided is
not determined in advance, the ladder being automatically divided upon
the determined period elapsing. A PMC which allows step sequence
programming executes the second level ladder in undivided system.

985
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

In divided execution, the second level ladder is executed at an interval that

is a multiple of 8 ms (e. g., 8, 16, 24 ms). Input signals referenced in the
second level ladder, such as addresses X and F, are refreshed in
synchronization with the execution period for the second level ladder, so
that they do not change during the execution.
All subprograms, created using either the ladder or step sequence method,
are called from the second level ladder. Hence, the execution time of the
second level ladder includes those of ladder subprograms, step sequence
programs (blocks), steps, and transitions. Since only the activated step
and the transition which checks the transition condition from the step to
the next step are executed in a step sequence program, the second level
ladder is executed much more frequently than may be expected from the
total number of steps.

LEVEL1 (Ladder diagram)

LEVEL2 (Ladder diagram)

CALLU P2

R0. 0
CALL P1

LEVEL3 (Ladder diagram)

P1 (Ladder diagram)

P2 (Step sequence)
L1
[ ] S1 (P3)

P4

S2 (P5)

P6
L1

P3 (Ladder diagram)

P4 (Ladder diagram)

Fig. 2.2 (c) Execution of step sequence

986
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS

In the step sequence program shown in Fig. 2.2 (c), when step S1 is
activated, subprograms are executed according to the timing illustrated in
Fig. 2.2 (d).

8msec

T msec

First level LEVEL1

Second level LEVEL2

Subprogram
P2 P1

Step
P3 P4

Transition

Third level LEVEL3

Fig. 2.2 (d) Timing of execution of step sequenceprogram

In this case, step sequence program P2, step P3, transition P4, and ladder
subprogram P1 are executed. Step P5 and transition P6 are not executed.

987
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

3 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF

STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

988
 3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS

3.1 A step is a unit of processing in a program.

STEP [Display]

Sn
(Pm)

[Contents]
D Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution, and
subprogram number (Pm) specifying actua processing, for a step.
D Assign a step number to a step.
D The same step number cannot be used twice in a program.
D A step has three logical states: the execution, transition to halt, and
halt states. The execution state is also called the active state. The
transition to halt and halt states are collectively called the inactive
state.
Sn.0
State Contents of operation Display
NOTE)
Activate Execution Activated step.
The action program (subprogram) is Sn 1
being executed.

Inactivate Transition to Transition from execution to halt.

halt The action program (subprogram) is
Sn 0
executed once only, then the step
automatically transits to halt.
Stop Not activated state.
The action program (subprogram) 0
has not yet been executed. Sn

NOTE
Refer to VI–4.2 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS)

Example) State transition of Step B

Transition A
Inactivate (halt state)

Step B
Transition A

Activate (execution state)

Transition C
Transition C

Inactivate (transition to halt)

(Execute one time)

989
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

[Example]
After the M7 code is decoded, control is transferred to the next step using
a DEC functional instruction.

S1
(P1) Subprogram P1
MF R0.0
DEC F0 f
F7.0
711

P101 Subprogram P101

R0.0
TRSET

990
 3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS

3.2 An initial step is automatically activated when execution of the program

starts. Once it has been activated, it operates in the same way as a normal
INITIAL STEP step. The program can be returned to this step through other steps.
[Display]

[ ] Sn
(Pm)

[Contents]
D Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution, and
subprogram number (Pm) specifying the actual processing, for an
initial step.
D All initial steps are activated when the other steps are not activated.
D Each block must contain at least one initial step. No limit is applied
to the number of initial steps contained in a block.
D A block having no initial step cannot be executed if called.
D Assign a step number to an initial step.
D The same step number cannot be used more than once in a program.
D In parallel branch, one initial step is required for each path. (See
example 2.)
[Example1]

L1
[ ] S1 When a program is executed, step P1, specified by
an initial step, is activated first.
P101

S2 Initial step S1 is executed in the same way as normal

step once S1 has been executed.
P102

L1

991
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

Example2

L1
When a program is executed, steps S3 and
S1 S4, specified by an initial step, are activated
first.
P101

Once steps S3 and S4 have been

[ ] S3 executed, initial steps S3 and S4 are
S2
executed in thesame way as normal
step when the program starts from step S1.
P102 P103

[ ] S4 S5

P110

L1

3.3 A transition specifies the conditions governing the transition from the
step to the next step.
TRANSITION
[Display]

Pn

[Contents]
D Only one transition is required between steps.
D Transition between steps is performed as described below.

S1 While S1 is activate, only S1 and P101 are

executed.
Other steps and transition are not executed.
P101 When the transition P102 evaluates true unles S2
is not being executed, the state is ignored.
S2

When the transition P101 evaluates true, control

P102 passes fro S1 to S2. In this case, when the condition
i true, S1 is terminated regardless of the state of S1,
and S2 is activated.

D When a signal is set to 1 in a transition, it remains the state even if

the control is transferred to the subsequentstep. To set the signal to
0, use another subprogram to do so.
[Example]
Refer an example described on the Step function (3.1).

992
 3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS

3.4 A selective sequence branches to two or more sequences. When the

transition evaluates true, the corresponding step is activated.
DIVERGENCE OF
SELECTIVE [Display]
SEQUENCE

[Contents]
D Transitions are placed after a divergence of selective sequence.
D The step connected to the transition for which the conditions are true
is first activated.
D When the conditions for any transition are true simultaneously, the
leftmost step is activated.
D A selective sequence can create up to 16 paths.
[Example]

[ ] S1
When the conditions for P101 are
satisfied earlier than those of P102,
P100 P101 step S3 is activated.

S2 S3

3.5 It combines two or more divergent paths to the main sequence.

CONVERGENCE OF [Display]
SELECTIVE
SEQUENCE

[Contents]
The number of divergent paths must match that of the convergent
paths.
[Example]

S2 S3 While step S3 is executed, the transition

P103 evaluates true, thus step S4 is
activated.
P102 P103

S4

993
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

3.6 A simultaneous sequence branches to two or more sequences, and all

steps are activated simultaneously.
DIVERGENCE OF
SIMULTANEOUS [Display]
SEQUENCE

[Contents]
D A transition must be placed before a divergence of simultaneous
sequence.
D All branched steps are activated simultaneously, then executed.
D A simultaneous sequence can create up to 16 paths.
[Example]

[ ] S1
When the transition P101 evaluates true,
P101 step S2 and S3 are activated simultaneously.

S2 S3

994
 3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS

3.7 It combines two or more divergent paths to the main sequence.

CONVERGENCE OF [Display]
SIMULTANEOUS
SEQUENCE

[Contents]
D A convergence of simultaneous sequence is processed as follows.

S10 S20 When the transition P120 evaluates

true, step S10 and S20 are terminated
and step S21 is activated.

P120

S21

D Wait processing is processed as follows.

case1 )

S10 S15 When the transition P109 evaluates true

unless both of step S11 and S16 are active,
control does not pass to step S20.
P110 P115
When the transition P109 evaluates true
while both of S11 and S16 are active, S11
S11 S16 and S16 are terminated and S20 is
activated. In the case, P109 provides the
termination conditions for both S11 and S16.

P109

S20

case2 )

S11 S16 To specify the termination conditions for

S11 and S16 separately, place the condi-
tions in P111 and P116 and specify two
P111 P116 dummy steps, S12 and S17, as shown
A dummy step also requires a step number
S12 S17 and subprogram number. Alsospecify a
(dummy) (dummy) dummy transition condition, which becomes
always true, in P110.

P110

S20

995
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

3.8 A jump controls the execution of steps non–sequentially, together with a

transition.
JUMP
[Display]

Ln

[Contents]
D Specify a jump destination label (Ln).
D The step to which control is transferred (jumped) is activated.
D The jump destination must be within the same program.
D A jump cannot be performed from outside a simultaneous sequence
to within the simultaneous sequence, or from within a simultaneous
sequence to outside.
D A jump cannot be performed between parallel–branched paths.
[Example]

L1
[ ] S1
When steps S4 and S5 ar
P101 executed and the transition P110
evaluates true, the program is
repeated from initial step S1.

S2 S3

P102 P103

S4 S5

P110

L1

3.9 A label specifies the jump destination.

LABEL [Display]

Ln

[Contents]
Specify the jump destination label (Ln).
[Example]
Refer to an example described on the jump function (3.8).

996
 3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS

3.10 A block step specifies the step sequence subprogram to be executed.

BLOCK STEP [Display]

] Sn
(Pm)

[Contents]
Define a step number (Sn), which controls the execution of a bloc
step, and a sub–program (Pm) specifying the actual process, for a
block step.

CAUTION
 Assign a step number to a block step.
 The same step number cannot be used twice in a program.
 A transition must be placed after a block step.
Example)
S1 S1

P101 P101

] S2
(P2) P2
S20 S20
equal
P120 P120

S21 S21

P121 P121

P102

S3 S3

 Transition P102 cannot be omitted due to the syntax of the step sequence method. Specify
a dummy transition, which becomes always true, for transition P102.
 Transition P121 must specify the transition condition for the termination of the step S21.
 When the conditions of transitions P102 and P121 are switched, step S21 will not be correctly
executed.

997
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
OF STEP–SEQUENCE
PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

3.11 This is an initial step on the block step.

INITIAL BLOCK STEP [Display]

[ ] Sn
(Pm)

[Contents]
D Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution, and
subprogram number (Pm)specifying the actual processing, for an
initial step.
D This step has the same function and graphical symbol asan initial
step.

3.12 This terminates a block step.

END OF BLOCK [Display]
STEP

[Contents]
D Use this step to terminate a block step.
D Each block requires at least one end block step. No limit is applied
to the number of end block steps.
[Example]

[ ] S1

P100 P103

S2

P102

998
 4. EXTENDED LADDER
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

4 EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS

To enable the specification of steps and transitions, the components of a

step sequence program, by means of the ladder method, the following
signals and functional instructions are provided. These signals and
instructions can only be used in subprograms in which step sequence step
and transitions are specified.

999
4. EXTENDED LADDER
INSTRUCTIONS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

4.1 [Function]
FUNCTIONAL D This instruction describes that the conditions for a transition have
been true.
INSTRUCTION TRSET
D This instruction is used in a subprogram which is called from a
transition.
[Format]

ACT

TRSET
(SUB122)

1000
 4. EXTENDED LADDER
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

4.2 [Contens]
PMC ADDRESS D The meaning of each bit of the step number (S address) is shown in
(S ADDRESS) the following.
.0 0 : Transition to halt state, or halt state
1 : Execution state
.4 0 : Transition to halt state, or halt state, or the scanning execute
for the first time.
1 : Execution state (Turned ON 1 scan delayed from .0)
D This address is used for creating a program in which detailed
transition of the execution states between steps are considered.
Specify the number of the step to be read.
Example) To reference the state of the step S100
S100. 0
D This address allows any subprogram to reference the state of any step.
D When 0 is written in the S address with byte size, the Execution State
of step that is specified can be initialized. When LADDER was
stopped, or the step which is no longer being called while in the
activated state, etc, the step sequence program can be execute from
the beginning when it is activated next time. The initialization of
Execution State of step should be carried out with state that step
sequence program which contains this step isn’t called (ACT=0). To
initialize a step sequence program, writes 0 in all the S addresses
included within the program.
D A ladder for the TRSET transition instruction can be programmed
using each bits of S address. Referring to S address, however,
adversely affects the portability and comprehensibility. Use this
feature sparingly.
[Example 1]
This address is used to reference the activation states of steps in a step
in which this address has been specified, and performs complicated
wait processing in a program including a simultaneous sequence.

In case of starting the executing of

S2 and S6 synchronously:

S1 S4

P1 P4 Sub program
S5.0
S2 S5 TRSET

P2 P1

S3 S6

1001
4. EXTENDED LADDER
INSTRUCTIONS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

[Example 2]
The section between JMP and JMPE in the following example is
execute only once after the specific step (The following example is
in the case of S100.) transits in the activated state from the inactivated
state.

1002
 5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE

5 SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE

1003
5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

5.1
SPECIFICATION Contents/Kind of PMC PMC–RB4/RB6/RC4/NB2
Number of subprogram Up to 2000 (P1 to P2000)
Number of step Up to 1000 (S1 to S1000)
Number of label Up to 9999 (L1 to L9999)
Number of jump in block Up to 256
Nesting depth of block step Up to 8 levels
Size of block 64 lines 32 columns
Number of paths Up to 16 paths

@@@@
@@@@
@@@@

Up to 16 paths

@@@@
@@@@

Up to 16 paths

1004
 5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE

5.2 D One transition must exist between step and step.

GENERAL RULES
S1 S1
(P10) (P10) sub prog
Correct
CALL P10
P1 or S1
CALL P11
S2 S2
(P11) (P11)
The step S1 calls
to subprogram P10, P11.

D The transition shall never be repeated even at the point of the divergence
and the convergence.

S1 S1

Correct
P1

P2 P10 P1 P10

S3 S10 S3 S10

S2 S10 S2 P10

Correct
P2 P11 P2 P11

P12

S12 S12

1005
5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

D When a simultaneous sequence is specified in another simultaneous

sequence, one convergence must not be used for each sequence.

S1 S2 S1 S2

P2 P2

S3 S4 S3 S4

Correct

P1 P3

S5 S5 (dumy)

P1

S6

D When a selective sequence is specified in a simultaneous sequence,

dummy steps must be required both after the divergence and before
convergence.

S1 P2 P4 S1 S2 (dummy)

S2 S3
P2 P4
P3 P5
S3 S4

Correct P3 P5

P1
S5 (dummy)
S4

P1

S6

1006
 5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE

D In case of branching again immediately after the convergence, a

step/transition is required between the divergence and convergence.

S1 S2 S1 S2
Correct

P2 P10 P100 (dummy)

S100 (dummy)
S3 S10

P1 P10

S3 S10

S2 S10 S2 S10

Correct
P2 P11 P2 P11

S12 S13 S100 (dummy)

P100 (dummy )

S12 S13

D Immediately after the block step, a dummy transition which is always

true is needed.

S10
[ ] S100
P10 When block step S11 is used,
P100 transition P11 and P101 cannot
] S11 be omitted
S101
P11 note) P11 is a dummy transition.
The transition condition of
P101 P11 must always be true.
S12

1007
5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

D The divergence must be terminated with the same type of convergence.

P2 P4 Correct P2 P4

S2 S3 S2 S3

P3 P5 P3 P5

P2 P2

Correct

S2 S3 S2 S3

P3
P3

D The number of convergences must match that of divergences.

P1 P2 P1 P2

S2 S3 L1 Correct S2 S3 L1

P3 P3

S4 S4

D The number of convergences must match that of divergences, even at

the end of a block step.

P1 P2 P1 P2

S2 S2

P3 Correct P3

1008
 5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE

D It is not possible to jump to the other subprogram.

Sub–program P1
Sub–program P2
S10
S100
P10
P100
L1
S101
S11 S20
P101
P11 P20
S102
S12 L1

D It is not possible to jump from a simultaneous sequence to another

simultaneous sequence.
S1

P1

S2 S10

P2 P10

S3 L1

P3
L1
S4

1009
5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

D It is not allowed to jump from inside of the simultaneous sequence to

outside.

L1
S1

P1

S2 S10 S20

P2 P10 P20

S3 S11 L1

1010
 5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE

5.3 The use of the following functional instructions is restricted in steps and
transitions.
EXCLUSIVE
CONTROL FOR Group Description
Functional
instructions
FUNCTIONAL
A The instructions operate when a signal changes CTR (SUB5)
INSTRUCTIONS Con– Multiple functional instructions having the same
CTRC (SUB60)
TMR (SUB3)
dition number are used. TMRB (SUB24)
TMRC (SUB54)
Prob Not activated. DIFU (SUB57)
–lem Correct operation cannot be guaranteed. DIFD (SUB58)
B Restriction due to the interface. WINDR (SUB51)
WINDW (SUB52)
Con– Data is input or output by using two subprograms. DISP (SUB49)
dition DISPB (SUB41)
Prob Invalid return value. EXIN (SUB40)
–lem Not terminated. AXCTL (SUB53)

(1) Functional instructions of group A

Since these functional instructions operate when the corresponding
signals change, they may not operate correctly when called from
multiplesteps.
Example)
While multiple CTR functional instructions are used, when
control passes from S1 to S2 with ACT of CTR not set to off, CTR
is not counted when called from step S2.

S1 Subprogram P100
(P100) R0.0
CTR 1 ( )
P1

S2
(P100)

X1.0

Subprogram P1
X1.0
TRSET

1011
5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

Correct program
Divide the subprogram so that ACT of CTR is called after it is set to
off.

S1 Subprogram P100
(P100)
R0.0
CTR 1 ( )
P101

S2
(P102)

X1.0
P103

S3
(P100)
Subprogram P101
X1.0
P101 TRSET

S4
(P102)
Subprogram P102
R0.0
P103 CTR 1 ( )

R9091.0

Subprogram P103
R9091.1
TRSET

(2) Functional instructions of group B

While an instruction is being executed through the interface with the
NC, other same instructions cannot be executed. PMC control
software does not receive the process when the instruction is not at
a same position (net).
If ACT is set to on and off in different instructions (or subprograms),
these processes are not terminated.

NOTE
In the window instructions (WINDR and WINDW),
low–speed–type is included the functional instructions of
group B.

1012
 5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE

Example)

S1 Subprogram P100
(P100) R9091.1 R0.0
P1 WINDR R10 ( )

S2
(P101) Subprogram P1
R0.0
TRSET

Subprogram P101
R9091.0 R0.0
WINDR R10 ( )

Correct program
Correct the program so that ACT is set to on and off within one
subprogram.

S1 Subprogram P100
(P100) R9091.1
R0.0
P1 ( )

S2 CALLU P2
(P101)

Subprogram P1
R0.0
TRSET

Subprogram P101
R9091.0 R0.0
( )

CALLU P2

Subprogram P2
R0.1 R0.0
WINDR R10 ( )

1013
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

6 SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

The following operations are supported to enable the diagnosis and

debugging of a step sequence program.
(1) Displaying the sequence diagram
(2) Displaying the run time of the step sequence program
(3) Monitoring the run time of the step sequence program

1014
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

6.1 The diagnosis and debugging of a step sequence program have four
screens.
DISPLAYING OF
SEQUENCE (1) Program configuration list (main screen)
PROGRAM (2) Step sequence screen
(3) List screen
(4) Ladder screen

6.1.1 Press the [STPSEQ] key and display the program configuration list.
Program Configuration
List (Main Screen) STPSEQ <<MAIN>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN
P0001 ( ) SUB PROGRAM NO.1

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

V P0001 V P0002 V P0004 V P0005 V P0006 V P0007
V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017
V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V] P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ TIME ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Items displayed on the screen

Display Contents Display by [ZOOM] key
LEVEL1 Ladder first level Ladder diagram
LEVEL2 Ladder second level Ladder diagram
LEVEL3 Ladder third level note1) Ladder diagram
V Pxxx Subprogram Ladder diagram
V] Pxxx Subprogram Step sequence diagram

Pxxx indicates a subprogram number.

NOTE
The third level ladder can be omitted.

[ZOOM] key
To display the contents of a program, position the cursor to the
program number and press the [ZOOM] key. The step sequence
diagram (Fig. 6.1.2 (b)) or ladder diagram (Fig. 6.1.3 (c) is
automatically displayed according to the type of the program.
[TIME] key
Press the [TIME] key to display the time display screen (Fig. 6.2.1)
and time monitor screen (Fig. 6.3).
[P–ADRS/P–SYMB] key
Displays the addresses specified to subprograms, using addresses or
symbols, if symbols have been assigned. When the [P–ADRS] key
ispressed, the addresses are displayed. When the [P–SYMB] key is
pressed, the symbols are displayed.

1015
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

6.1.2 (1) Position the cursor to a program indicated by V], then press the
[ZOOM] key.
Step Sequence Screen
STPSEQ <<MAIN>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN
P0407 (MAIN ) STEP SEQUENCE NO.1

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

V P0001 V P0002 V P0004 V P0005 V P0006 V P0007
V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017
V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V] P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ TIME ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.1.2 (a) Program configuration list (main screen)

Example)
When the cursor is positioned to V] P0407 and press the [ZOOM]
key, the subprogram P407 isdisplayed.
(2) Displayed Step Sequence
Activated steps are indicated by red V (highlighted V on a
monochrome display). (In this manual, activated steps are indicated
by H.)

PCLAD <<STPSEQ>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN

S0001 P0001(ROTATE) ROTATE THE WORK TIP P0407 1– 1
<– L1
[ ] S1
P1

<– L4
] S2 S10 S20 S30

P2 P10 P13 P20 P30

<– L2
S3 S11 S13 S21 S31

P3 P11 P14 P21 P23 P31

S4 S14 S23 –> L2
P15 P22 S32

S15 S24

[ MAIN ] [ CHANGE ] [ TIME ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.1.2 (b) Step sequence screen

1016
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

Meaning of display
Display Contents Display by [ZOOM] key
[V] Sxxx Initial step Ladder diagram
V Sxxx Step Ladder diagram
V] Sxxx Block step Step sequence diagram
+ Pxxx Transition Ladder diagram
Selective sequence Cannot zoom.
Simultaneous sequence Cannot zoom.

L2 Jump Cannot zoom.

L2 Label Cannot zoom.

Pxxx means the subprogram number.

[ZOOM] key
To display the contents of a program, position the cursor to the
program number and press the [ZOOM] key. The step sequence
diagram (Fig.6.1.2 (b)) or ladder diagram (Fig.6.1.3 (c)) is
automatically displayed according to the type of the program.
[MAIN] key
Press the [MAIN] key to return to the program configuration list.
[CHANGE] key
Press the [CHANGE] key to list the subprograms referenced in the
step sequence program.
[TIME] key
Press the [TIME] key to display the time display screen (Fig. 6.2.1).
[P–ADRS/P–SYMB/S–ADRS/S–SYMB] key
Displays the addresses specified with steps and transitions, using
addresses or symbols, if symbols have been assigned. And the display
of steps is changed to display the S addresses or P addresses.
Press the [P–ADRS] key to display the addresses of P addresses.
Press the [P–SYMB] key to display the symbols of P addresses.
Press the [S–ADRS] key to display the addresses of S addresses.
Press the [S–SYMB] key to display the symbols of S addresses.
(3) Displaying the list screen
While the step sequence screen is displayed and press the [CHANGE]
key, a list screen of the subprograms referenced in this step sequence
program is displayed.

PCLAD <<LIST>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN

S0001 P0001 (ROTATE) ROTATE THE WORK TIP
V] P0001 V] P0002 V] P0004 V] P0005 V] P0006 V] P0007

V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017

V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V]P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V]P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ ] [ ] [ ZOOM ]

[ MAIN ] [ CHANGE ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

1017
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

[ZOOM] soft ke
To display a program, position the cursor to the program number and
press the [ZOOM] key. The step sequence screen (Fig. 6.1.2 (b)) or
ladder screen (Fig. 6.1.3 (c)) is automatically displayed according to
the type of the program.
[MAIN] key
Press the [MAIN] key to return to the program configuration list.
[TIME] key
Press the [TIME] key to display the time display screen (Fig. 6.2.1).
[P–ADRS/P–SYMB] key
Displays the addresses specified to subprograms, using addresses or
symbols, if symbols have been assigned. When the [P–ADRS] key
is pressed, the addresses are displayed. When the [P–SYMB] key is
pressed, the symbols are displayed.
[CHANGE] key
Press the [CHANGE] key to return to the step sequence diagram.

6.1.3 (1) Position the cursor to a program indicated by V, then press the
[ZOOM] key.
Ladder Screen
STPSEQ <<MAIN>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

V P0001 V P0002 V P0004 V P0005 V P0006 V P0007
V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017
V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V] P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V]P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ TIME ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.1.3 (a) Program configuration list (main screen)

Example)
When the cursor is positioned to LEVEL1, press the[ZOOM]
key, the first level ladder is displayed.

PCLAD <<STPSEQ>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN

S0001 P0001 (ROTATE) ROTATE THE WORK TIP P0100 4– 2
<– L1
[ ] S1
P1

<– L4
] S10 S20 S30
S2
P2 P10 P13 P20 P30
<– L2
S3 S11 S13 S21 S31

[ MAIN ] [ CHANGE ] [ TIME ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.1.3 (b) Step Sequence screen

1018
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

Example)
When the cursor is positioned to “P2”, press the [ZOOM] key,
subprogram P2 is displayed.
(2) Ladder Screen
The signals currently set to on are displayed in white (highlighted on
a monochrome display).

LADDER * STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM * NET 0031–0033 MONIT RUN

R9091.1
MOVN 20
D10
R10
FIN
FIN
/ WINDR R10 ( )

FIN
MOVN 20
R10
SUB 45 D10

END1

SUB 1

[ SEARCH ] [ ADRESS ] [ TRIGER ] [ WINDOW ] [ ]

[ DUMP ] [ DPARA ] [ ] [ ONLEDT ] [ ]

Fig. 6.1.3 (c) Ladder screen

[SEARCH] key
Used for search within a subprogram.

SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW

RET

TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N– SRCH

NEXT

F–SRCH

[TOP] key
Displays the top of a subprogram.
[BOTTOM] key
Displays the bottom of a subprogram.
[SRCH] key
Searches for the specified address.

1019
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

[W–SRCH] key
Displays the ladder in which the specified address is used as a coil
address.
[N–SRCH] key
Displays the ladder having the specified net number, at the top of
the screen.
[F–SRCH] key
Displays the specified functional instruction, at the to of the
screen.
[ADRESS/SYMBOL] key
Displays the addresses specified with relays and coils, using
addresses or symbols, if symbols have been assigned. When the
[ADRESS] key is pressed, the addresses are displayed. When the
[SYMBOL] key is pressed, the symbols are displayed.
[TRIGER] key
With a manual operation or a signal trigger function, a renewal
screen of a ladder monitoring function is stopped. By this
function, the signal status when one signal is changed is certainly
checked.
[WINDOW] key
Splits the screen into two sections, allowing the display of two
ladder positions in a subprogram.
[DUMP] key
Displays the contents of addresses at the bottom of the screen.
[DPARA] key
Displays the data specified with functional instructions.
[ONLEDT] key
While a sequence program is executing, a part of the ladder
diagram can be changed.

1020
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

6.2 The elapsed time of a step sequence program is displayed.

TIMER SCREEN

6.2.1
Time Screen
STPSEQ <<STATUS>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN

STEP NO. STATUS ELAPSE MONITOR STEP NO. STATUS.

S0001( ) EXEC 1000000 T(1) OVER S0010(TILE ) EXEC
S0002( ) EXEC 100 T(3) S0011( )
S0003( ) EXEC 10000 T(4) S0012( )
S0004( ) 1000000 S0013( )
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ SEARCH ] [ RESET ] [ MONIT ]

Fig. 6.2.1 Time screen

Meaning of display
Display Contents
STEP NO. Step number
S0001 : Step number (123456) : symbol display
STATUS Step state
EXEC : Active space : Inactive
ELAPSE Actual elapsed time (per msec)
The time is increasing during active state.
MONITOR Monitor time
T (1) : monitoring time number
OVER : An elapsed time is over monitoring time

[UP] [DOWN] key

Scrolls the screen up or down, in units of pages, to display the
operation time of other steps. Acts in the same way as the page up
or down key.
[MONIT] key
Displays the screen used for setting the timer to monitor the operation
time. (See 6.3)
[SEARCH] key
Search and display the specified step number.
example) Display the S100 address.
Key in “100” and press the [SEARCH] key.
[RESET] key
For all of monitoring steps, the error status which occurred by the
monitoring function is canceled.
To cancel the status per steps, press the [DELETE] key on the monitor
time screen. (Please refer to 6.3 Monitor Time Screen below)

1021
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

6.2.2 When an activated state remains set for longer than the specified time,
Monitoring Elapsed the state may be determined as being erroneous. The elapsed time can be
specified for up to eight steps.
Time
When an activated state remains set for longer than the specified time,
(1) OVER is displayed at the corresponding step number on the
STPSEQ/TIME screen.
(2) Execution of the ladder continues.
(3) The bit of address R9118 which corresponds with the step number is
set to
1. The processes for the error status can be program by the ladder
diagram. And the following message is displayed on the
PMC/ALARM screen.
”ER48 STEP SEQUENCE TIME OVER (xxH)”
”xx” displays the content of address R9118 in hexadecimal code.
Time Corresponding Time Corresponding
Number Address Number Address
1 R9118.0 5 R9118.4
2 R9188.1 6 R9118.5
3 R9188.2 7 R9188.6
4 R9188.3 8 R9188.7

1022
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

6.3 Operation time limits can be specified for a step sequence program. Up
to eight steps can be monitored.
MONITOR TIME
SCREEN
STPSEQ<<MONITOR>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN

NO. STEP NO. ELAPSE MONITOR

T(1) S0001( ) 1000000 2000
T(2) S0010(MOVE ) 100 1000
T(3) S0002( ) 100 2000
T(4) S0003( ) 10000 20000
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)

[ DELETE ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

Fig. 6.3 monitor time screen

Meaning of display
Display Meaning
NO. Monitor time number
T (1) : means monitor time 1.
STEP NO. Step number
S0001 : Step number (123456) : symbol display
ELAPSE Actual elapsed time (per msec)
The time is increasing during active state.
MONITOR Monitor time (per msec)

[DELETE] key
Delete the definition of monitor time.
Operation
Definition of monitor
(1) Position the cursor at the input position and input a step
(or symbol).

NO. STEP NO. ELAPSE MONITOR

T(1) S0001( ) 1000000 2000
T(2) S0010(MOVE )

Key in “MOVE” and push [INPUT] key.

(2) Position the cursor at the input position and define a monitor
time.

NO. STEP NO. ELAPSE MONITOR

T(1) S0001( ) 1000000 2000
T(2) S0010(MOVE ) 1000 100

Keyin “100” and push [INPUT] key.

1023
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

Deletion of monitor
Position the cursor at the deletion and press [DELETE] key.

NO. STEP NO. ELAPSE MONITOR

T(1) S0001( ) 1000000 2000
T(2) S0010(MOVE ) 100 1000

Alteration of monitor
Position the cursor at the alteration position and input again.

NO. STEP NO. ELAPSE MONITOR

T(1) S0001( ) 1000000 2000
T(2) S0100( ) 2000 1000

Key in “S100” and push <INPUT> key.

1024
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

6.4 The display and editing of a step sequence program per subprogram
aresupported.
EDITING FUNCTION A step sequence program is allowed to be displayed and a ladder diagram
OF LADDER is allowed to be displayed and edited.
DIAGRAM

6.4.1 Press the [EDIT] and [LADDER] key and display the program
Program Configuration configuration list.
List (Main Screen)
STPSEQ <<MAIN>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT STOP
P0001 ( ) SUB PROGRAM NO.1

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

V P0001 V P0002 V P0004 V P0005 V P0006 V P0007
V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017
V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V] P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Items displayed on the screen

Display Contents Display by [ZOOM] key
LEVEL1 Ladder first level Ladder diagram
LEVEL2 Ladder second level Ladder diagram
LEVEL3 Ladder third level (Note) Ladder diagram
V Pxxx Subprogram Ladder diagram
V] Pxxx Subprogram Step sequence diagram

Pxxx indicates a subprogram number.

NOTE
The third level ladder can be omitted.

[ZOOM] key
To display the contents of a program, position the cursor to the
program number and press the [ZOOM] key. The step sequence
diagram (Fig. 6.4.2 (b)) or ladder diagram (Fig. 6.4.3 (c)) is
automatically displayed according to the type of the program.
[P–ADRS/P–SYMB] key
Displays the addresses specified to subprograms, using addresses or
symbols, if symbols have been assigned. When the [P–ADRS] key
is pressed, the addresses are displayed. When the [P–SYMB] key is
pressed, the symbols are displayed.

1025
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

6.4.2 (1) Position the cursor to a program indicated by j], then press the
[ZOOM] key.
Step Sequence Screen
LADDER <<MAIN>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT STOP
P0407 ( ) STEP SEQUENCE NO.1

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

V P0001 V P0002 V P0004 V P0005 V P0006 V P0007
V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017
V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V] P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ TIME ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.4.2 (a) Program configuration list (main screen)

Example)
When the cursor is positioned to j] P0407 and press the
[ZOOM] key , the subprogram P407 is displayed.
(2) Displayed Step Sequence
Activated steps are indicated by red j (highlighted j on a
monochrome display). (In this manual, activated steps are indicated
by J.)

LADDER <<STPSEQ>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT STOP

S0001 P0001(ROTATE) ROTATE THE WORK TIP P0407 1– 1
<– L1
[ ] S1
P1

<– L4
] S2 S10 S20 S30

P2 P10 P13 P20 P30

<– L2
S3 S11 S13 S21 S31

P3 P11 P14 P21 P23 P31

S4 S14 S23 –> L2
P15 P22 S32

S15 S24

[ MAIN ] [ CHANGE ] [ ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.4.2 (b) Step sequence screen

1026
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

Meaning of display
Display Contents Display by [ZOOM] key
[V] Sxxx Initial step Ladder diagram
V Sxxx Step Ladder diagram
V] Sxxx Block step Step sequence diagram
+ Pxxx Transition Ladder diagram
Selective sequence Cannot zoom.
Simultaneous sequence Cannot zoom.

L2 Jump Cannot zoom.

L2 Label Cannot zoom.

Pxxx means the subprogram number.

[ZOOM] key
To display the contents of a program, position the cursor to the
program number and press the [ZOOM] key. The step sequence
diagram (Fig. 6.4.2 (b)) or ladder diagram (Fig. 6.4.3 (c)) is
automatically displayed according to the type of the program.
[MAIN] key
Press the [MAIN] key to return to the program configuration list.
[CHANGE] key
Press the [CHANGE] key to list the subprograms referenced in
the step sequence program.
[P–ADRS/P–SYMB/S–ADRS/S–SYMB] key
Displays the addresses specified with steps and transitions, using
addresses or symbols, if symbols have been assigned.
And the display of steps is changed to display the S addresses or
P addresses.
Press the [P–ADRS] key to display the addresses of P addresses.
Press the [P–SYMB] key to display the symbols of P addresses.
Press the [S–ADRS] key to display the addresses of S addresses.
Press the [S–SYMB] key to display the symbols of S addresses.
(3) Displaying the list screen
While the step sequence screen is displayed and press the [CHANGE]
key, a list screen of the subprograms referenced in this step sequence
program is displayed.

LADDER <<LIST>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT STOP

S0001 P0001 (ROTATE) ROTATE THE WORK TIP
V] P0001 V] P0002 V] P0004 V] P0005 V] P0006 V] P0007

V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017

V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V]P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ CHANGE ] [ ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

[ZOOM] soft key

To display a program, position the cursor to the program number
and press the [ZOOM] key. The step sequence screen (Fig. 6.4.2
(b)) or ladder screen (Fig. 6.4.3 (c)) is automatically displayed
according to the type of the program.

1027
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

[MAIN] key
Press the [MAIN] key to return to the program configuration list.
[CHANGE] key
Press the [CHANGE] key to return to the step sequence diagram.
[P–ADRS/P–SYMB] key
Displays the addresses specified to subprograms, using addresses
or symbols, if symbols have been assigned. When the [P–ADRS]
key is pressed, the addresses are displayed. When the [P–SYMB]
key is pressed, the symbols are displayed.

6.4.3 (1) Position the cursor to a program indicated by j, then press the
[ZOOM] key.
Ladder Screen

LADDER <<MAIN>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT STOP

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

V P0001 V P0002 V P0004 V P0005 V P0006 V P0007
V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017
V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V] P0027
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
V P0101 V P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407

[ UP ] [ DOWN ] [ ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.4.3 (a) Program configuration list (main screen)

Example)
When the cursor is positioned to LEVEL1, press the [ZOOM] key, the
first level ladder is displayed.

LADDER <<STPSEQ>> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT STOP

S0001 P0001 (ROTATE) ROTATE THE WORK TIP P0100 4– 2
<– L1
[ ] S1
P1

<– L4
] S10 S20 S30
S2
P2 P10 P13 P20 P30
<– L2
S3 S11 S13 S21 S31

[ MAIN ] [ CHANGE ] [ ] [ P–ADRS ] [ ZOOM ]

Fig. 6.4.3 (b) Step Sequence screen

Example)
When the cursor is positioned to ” P2”, press the [ZOOM] key, the
subprogram P2 is displayed.

1028
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

(2) Ladder Screen

LADDER NET 0031–0033 MONIT STOP

R9091.1
MOVN 20
D10
R10
FIN
FIN
/ WINDR R10 ( )

FIN
MOVN 20
R10
SUB 45 D10

END1

SUB 1

Fig. 6.4.3 (c) Ladder screen

Please refer to the following section about the operations of editing a
ladder diagram.
III PMC PROGRAMMER(CRT/MDI) 5.2 Sequence
Program Generation(LADDER)

1029
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

6.5 The following ladder diagnosis and debugging functions can be used
together with the step sequence functions.
CORRESPONDING
FUNCTION Ę : can be used
∆ : can be used on condition
: cannot be used
Functions PMC–SB4/ PMC–SC4 PMC–NB2
SB6
PMC Ladder diagram display (PMCLAD)
PMC I/O signal display (PMCDGN)
Title screen (TITLE) Ę Ę Ę
Signal status screen (STATUS) Ę Ę Ę
Alarm screen (ALARM) Ę Ę Ę
Trace screen (TRACE) Ę Ę Ę
Contents of Memory (MEMORY) Ę Ę Ę
Signal Waveforms screen (ANALYS) ∆ NOTE1 Ę Ę
Running State of a User Task (USRDGN) Ę Ę
PMC Parameters screen (PMCPRM)
Timer screen (TIMER) Ę Ę Ę
Counter screen (COUNTR) Ę Ę Ę
Keep relay screen (KEEPRL) Ę Ę Ę
Data table screen (DATA) Ę Ę Ę
Simple setting screen (SETING) Ę Ę Ę
Step Sequence screen (STPSEQ)
Displaying Step Sequence screen Ę Ę Ę
Displaying Ladder screen Ę Ę Ę
SEARCH Ę Ę Ę
Display address and symbol Ę Ę Ę
Trigger function (TRIGER) Ę Ę Ę
Divided screen function (WINDOW) Ę Ę Ę
Contents of memory (DUMP) Ę Ę Ę
Contents of parameter (DPARA) Ę Ę Ę
online editting (ONLEDT) ∆ Ę Ę
Time screen (TIME) Ę Ę Ę
Monitor time screen (MONIT) Ę Ę Ę
Execute or stop the sequence program (RUN) Ę Ę Ę
Edit function (EDIT) NOTE1
Title screen (TITLE) ∆ Ę Ę
Ladder diagram (LADDER) ∆ Ę Ę
Symbol screen (SYMBOL) ∆ Ę Ę
Message screen (MESAGE) ∆ Ę Ę
Definition of I/O (MODULE) ∆ Ę Ę
Cross reference (CROSS) ∆ Ę Ę
Memory clear (CLEAR) ∆ Ę Ę
Input and output
FANUC LADDER (HOST) Ę Ę Ę
Floppy cassette (FDCAS) Ę Ę Ę
FlashROM (F–ROM) Ę Ę Ę
Memory card (M–CARD) ∆ NOTE2 Ę Ę
Other I/O device (OTHERS) Ę Ę Ę
System Parameter (SYSPRM) ∆ NOTE1 Ę Ę
Debug function (MONIT) NOTE1
Ladder debug function (DBGLAD)
Descriptor table screen (GDT) Ę Ę
User memory screen (USRMEM) Ę Ę
User program debug function (DEBUG) Ę Ę

NOTE
1 An Editor card is needed.
2 It is possible to use while an Editor card is not mounted.
(Can be used with the 16i/18i/21i.)

1030
 6. SCREEN OPERATION
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2)

6.6 The PMC–SB4, SB6, SC4 and NB2 can be used with either the ladder
method or step sequence method. When a step sequence program is
COMPATIBILITY OF transferred to the old version of the PMC, ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH
LADDER DIAGRAM is displayed on the PMC/ALARM screen.
The model setting of FANUC LADDER determines whether the ladder
or step sequence method is used. The STEP SEQUENCE item has been
added to the system parameter screen for future expansion. Specify the
parameter according to the model setting of FANUC LADDER.
To create a program with the built–in edit function, after the parameter has
been set execute CLEAR ALL. Alternatively, while holding down “X”
and “O” key, turn the power off and on.
When the step sequence method is used: STEP SEQUENCE = YES.
When the ladder method is used: STEP SEQUENCE = NO.

PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (1/2) MONIT STOP

COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY / BCD

STEP SEQUENCE = YES / NO

>

[BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

Fig. 6.6 (a) PMC–SB4/SB6 system parameter screen (first page)

PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (2/2) MONIT STOP

FS0 OPERATOR PANEL = YES / NO

KEY DI ADDRESS =

LED DO ADDRESS =

KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS =

LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS =

>

[ YES ] [ NO ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

Fig. 6.6 (b) PMC–SB4/SB6 system parameter screen (second page)

1031
6. SCREEN OPERATION
(PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (1/2) MONIT STOP

COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY / BCD

LADDER EXEC = % (1–150)

LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO = % (0–99)

LANGUAGE ORIGIN = H
(LANGUAGE AREA = H, SIZE = KB)

STEP SEQUENCE = YES / NO

>

[BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

Fig. 6.6 (c) PMC–SC4/NB2 system parameter screen (first page)

PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (2/2) MONIT STOP

FS0 OPERATOR PANEL = YES / NO

KEY DI ADDRESS =

LED DO ADDRESS =

KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS =

LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS =

>

[ YES ] [ NO ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

Fig. 6.6 (d) PMC–SC4/NB2 system parameter screen (second page)

1032
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

7 OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

The following operations are supported to enable the diagnosis and

debugging of a step sequence program.
(1) Displaying step sequence diagram and editing ladder diagram.
(2) Displaying the run status of the step sequence program.
(3) Monitoring the run time of the step sequence program.

1033
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

7.1 Pressing soft key [PMCLAD] displays the sequence program

dynamically. On the screen, you can monitor the sequence program
DISPLAYING OF works. Sequence program monitor function consists of following screens.
SEQUENCE a) Program List Viewer screen
PROGRAM Chooses the subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen.
b) Step Sequence Monitor screen
Displays Step Sequence Diagram and the current status of step,
transition and others.
c) Subprogram List Viewer screen
Chooses the subprogram to be used at step sequence.
d) LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
Displays LADDER Diagram and the current status of relays and
others.
e) Collective Monitor screen
Displays only selected ladder diagram and the current status of relays
and others.
f) LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Edits LADDER Diagram by the net.
g) Program List Editor screen
Edits LADDER Diagram by the subprogram. Also chooses the
subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram Editor screen.

NOTE
You can hide [PMCLAD] soft key at PMC Main Menu by
setting the keep relay of K900.0 to 1.

These screens can be reached as described bellow.

PMC Main menu

[<] [PMCLAD] Monitor Function

NOTE1
[STEP] [LIST]
Step Sequence Step Sequence Program List Viewer screen
State Screen (Sub) Monitor Screen [ZOOM]
[STATE]
[ZOOM] [LIST] [ZOOM] [LIST] [ZOOM]
[STATE] [SPLIST] [STEP] [SPLIST]
[BACK] [SWITCH]
Subprogram List Viewer Screen [BACK] Ladder Diagram Collective
[BACK] [ZOOM] Monitor screen Monitor screen
[SWITCH]
[ZOOM]
[<] [EDIT]
[LIST]
[STEP]
Step Sequence Step Sequence Ladder Diagram Program List
State Screen (Sub) Monitor Screen Editor screen Editor screen
[ZOOM] [ZOOM], [<]
[STATE]
[STATE] [SPLIST] [STEP] [SPLIST] [<] [CREATE],[MODIFY]

Subprogram List Viewer Screen

Net Editor screen
Editor Function

Fig. 7.1 Relation of monitor and editor screen

1034
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

NOTE
1 When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed, the screen which was
displayed last time among Ladder Diagram Monitor screen,
Collective Monitor screen, Step Sequence Monitor screen,
and Program List Viewer screen is displayed. When
[PMCLAD] soft key is pressed at first time after CNC power
is on, Program List Viewer screen is displayed. Changing
the ladder program by I/O function will also make Program
List Viewer screen appears at [PMCLAD] soft key again.
See ”Program List Viewer screen” for more detail.
2 [EDIT] soft key in Ladder Diagram Monitor screen appears
only when Programmer function is enabled. To enable
Programmer function, set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to
”YES” at GENERAL screen of PMC Settings or set keep
relay K900.1 to 1. Or, set ”EDIT ENABLE” to ”YES” or set
K901.6 to 1. While Online Monitor function is active, you can
not reach Ladder Diagram Editor screen. To use Ladder
Diagram Editor function, you have to disable Online Monitor
function at ”RS–232C” and ”F–BUS” on ”PARAMETERS
FOR ONLINE MONITOR”: choose ”NOT USE”.
3 Refer to ”7.2 DISPLAYING RUN STATUS ” for the Step
Sequence State screen in the figure.

7.1.1 The subprogram of step sequence can farther more call other subprogram
of step sequence. (So, called ”nesting of the block”) Therefore, you must
Hierarchy of Monitor
think about the level of nested hierarchy of a current subprogram when
you think about the movement of the screen of step sequence program. As
for this hierarchy, a Subprogram List Viewer screen is the top. As nest of
the subprogram becomes deeper, the hierarchy falls down.
There are three screen which displays information on the subprogram of
step sequence. The Step Sequence Monitor screen, the Step Sequence
State screen, the Sub Program List Viewer screen. These three screens can
display the various information of the same subprogram by changing
display by the [STEP], [SPLIST], [STATE] soft keys. These soft key will
switch these screens in the same level of the program hierarchy.
Contrary to this, the screen moves to the Step Sequence Monitor screen
at one deeper level in the hierarchy when the cursor is put on a step
sequence and [ZOOM]soft key is pushed on the Step Sequence Monitor
screen or the Subprogram List Viewer screen. When [BACK] soft key is
pushed, it is returned to Step Sequence Monitor screen of the hierarchy
(= one level upper in the hierarchy ) of the subprogram is called.

1035
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

7.1.2 When Step Sequence Monitor screen is displayed for the first time after
Program List Viewer the power–ON, the subprogram of step sequence is select on the Program
List Viewer screen.
Screen

Fig. 7.1.2 Program List Viewer screen (Step Sequence)

The subprogram of step sequence is displayed with ”S” in the ”L/S” field
of the Program List Viewer screen. The screen changes to Step Sequence
Monitor screen when the cursor is put on this subprogram and
[ZOOM]key is pushed.
Refer to ”3.3 PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN” of ”V.
FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION” for the
Program List Viewer screen.

1036
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

7.1.3 When a cursor is put on step sequence in the Program List Viewer screen,
Step Sequence Monitor Subprogram List Viewer screen, or Step Sequence Monitor screen, and
[ZOOM]key is pushed, Step Sequence Monitor screen is displayed.
Screen

7.1.3.1
Structure of screen
Current subprogram Coordinate

Activated Step

Additional information line

Message Line

Fig. 7.1.3.1 Step Sequence Monitor screen

(a)Screen Structure
1. The information of current subprogram, and coordinate of the
cursor position, are displayed above the screen.
2. In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be
displayed depending on the situation.
3. In the additional information line, the detail for step sequence
under the cursor is displayed. When the cursor is on the various
steps, contents of display change by the setting of ”STEP
NOTATION” of ”7.1.3.3 SETTING THE SCREEN”.
D ”STEP NOTATION” is ”S–ADDRESS”:
[Address P] Address S: Symbol of address S
(Comment of address S)
D ”STEP NOTATION” is ”P–ADDRESS”:
[Address S] Address P: Symbol of address P
(Comment of address P)
When a cursor is on the transition, jump, or label, information are
displayed with the following format.
Blank Address: Symbol (Comment)
4. The step sequence figure can be displays vertical 16 elements,
horizontal 8 elements in 1 screen.

1037
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

7.1.3.2
Operations

1 hierarchy up Subprogram list view screen

Displays subprogram Step sequence state screen Search subprogram Screen settings

Fig. 7.1.3.2 Soft keys of Step Sequence Monitor screen

(a) Operation with Soft–keys
1 [ZOOM] Display the contents of program
Changes to LADDER Diagram Monitor screen or Step Sequence
Monitor screen. If you press [ZOOM] soft key without strings, the
program under the cursor is displayed at LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen or Step Sequence Monitor screen.
If you entered program name or symbol before pressing [ZOOM]
soft key, the program according to the preceding string is searched
and the program is displayed at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
or Step Sequence Monitor screen.
But, when the selected program is protected to monitor, you have
to unlock the protection.
When it exceeds 8 hierarchies and [zoom] soft key is pushed, an
error message is displayed, and zoom doesn’t occur.
2 [BACK]
If the screen (the screen chosen from the Program List Viewer
screen) of the first hierarchy is displayed, returned to the Program
List Viewer screen.
If the screen after the second hierarchy is displayed, returned to the
Step Sequence Monitor screen in 1 hierarchy.
3 [SPLIST]
The screen display is switched into the Subprogram List Viewer
screen which display the list of the subprogram being referred to
with displaying step sequence.
4 [STATE]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence State screen.
5 [SEARCH] Search for program
Searches the program. If you entered program name or symbol and
press [SEARCH] soft key, the program according to the preceding
string is searched and the cursor points the program. If you press
[SEARCH] soft key without entering string, the string that
succeeded in the latest is re–searched.
If WRAP SEARCH ENABLED (refer to ”7.1.3.3 SETTING THE
SCREEN”) is set to ”NO”, search process will stop when reached
the bottom of program. If it is set to ”YES”, downward search will
continue from the top of program when reaches the bottom.

1038
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

6 [SETING]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence Monitor
Setting screen.
7 [<]
The screen display is switched into the PMC Main menu.
(b) Other operations
1 Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change
keys.
And if you entered program name or symbol and press Right cursor
move key, the program according to the proceeding string is
searched, the cursor points the program.
2 INPUT key
You can operate as same as [ZOOM] soft key.

7.1.3.3 Setting the display form of the Step Sequence Monitor Setting screen.
Setting the screen The setting of each item is done by the choice by the left and right cursor
key or the soft key.

Fig. 7.1.3.3 Step Sequence Monitor Setting screen

(a) Setting items
D ADDRESS NOTATION
Determines whether the subprogram in the Step Sequence Monitor
screen is displayed as corresponding symbols, or the addresses
themselves.
SYMBOL
Addresses that have a symbol are displayed by the symbols.
Addresses without symbols are displayed by the addresses
themselves.
ADDRESS (default)
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves even if
they have a symbol.

1039
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

D STEP NOTATION
Determines whether the subprograms of step in the Step Sequence
Monitor screen are displayed as S–address, or the P–address. Only
various steps are available in this setting.
S–ADDRESS (default)
When the setting of the ”ADDRESS NOTATION” is
”ADDRESS”, various steps are displayed the S address (step
number). When the setting of the ”ADDRESS NOTATION” is
”SYMBOL”, the symbol defined in the S address is displayed.
P–ADDRESS
When the setting of the ”ADDRESS NOTATION” is
”ADDRESS”, various steps are displayed the P address
(subprogram number). When the setting of the ”ADDRESS
NOTATION” is ”SYMBOL”, the symbol defined in the P
address is displayed.
D DIAGRAM COLOR(6 is default : Black)
Sets the color of the sequence diagram except for the active step
mark. Enter a number, increase or decrease the number using the
left and right arrow keys. You can specify one of 14 numbers from
0 to 13.
D ACTIVE STEP COLOR(0 is default : Red)
Sets the color of the activated step of the Step Sequence Monitor
screen. Set the color in the same way as for diagram color.
D WRAP SEARCH ENABLED
Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top to
continue to search.
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER
when reaches bottom. Upward search will also continue to
search from bottom when reaches top.
NO
Search process will stop when reached top or bottom, and
displays an error message at Message Line.
(b) Operation with Soft–keys
D [INIT]
All settings will be initialized to the default values.
D [<]
Return to Step Sequence Monitor screen.

1040
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

7.1.4 When [SPLIST]key is pushed on Step Sequence Monitor screen, the list
Subprogram List of the current subprogram being used with step sequence is displayed.
Viewer Screen
7.1.4.1 Subprogram List Viewer screen (Detail) shows the detail information of
Detail screen the subprogram being used with displaying step sequence.
History display line Current subprogram

Area for Program List

Message Line

Fig. 7.1.4.1 Subprogram List Viewer screen (Detail)

(a) Screen Structure
1 The information (comment, program number, symbol) of current
subprogram, and the number of programs which are used in the
selected subprogram, are displayed above the screen.
2. In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be
displayed depending on the situation.
3. The subprogram of each hierarchy is displayed on the history
display line.
4. In the area for Program List, 14 data can be displayed at maximum.
(b) Area of Program List
1. Kind of subprogram is displayed in the ”L/S” field.
L: LADDER
S: Step Sequence
2. Program name is displayed in the ”PROG NO.” field for each
program.
Pm (m=1~2000): It means subprogram.
3. The symbol (16 characters) is displayed in the ”SYMBOL” field
for each program.
If no symbol is set into the subprogram, the ”SYMBOL” field will
be blank.
4. The comment (30 characters) is displayed in the ”COMMENT”
field for each program.
If no comment is set into the subprogram, the ”COMMENT” field
will be blank.

1041
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

5. The program size is displayed in the ”SIZE (BYTE)” field for each
program.
If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in byte.
If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte with
”K”.
Ex.) The case that program size is not over 1024 byte.
1023 bytes: ”1023” is shown.
Ex.) The case that program size is over 1024 byte.
20000 bytes: ”19.5K” is shown.
6. The status of protection is displayed in the ”P” field for each
program.
Following icons mean the status of protection.
P: Monitoring and editing program are disabled.
R: Monitoring program is enabled. Editing program is
disabled.
(Blank): Monitoring and editing program are enabled.

7.1.4.2 Program List Viewer screen (Brief) shows less information than Program
Brief screen List Viewer screen (Detail), to increase the number of items. The program
type, the status of protection and the name of symbol are displayed for
each program.
The detail information of program that is pointed by the cursor is
displayed on additional information line.

Fig. 7.1.4.2 Subprogram List Viewer screen (Brief)

(a) Screen Structure
1. The information (comment, program number, symbol) of current
subprogram, and the number of programs which use the selected
subprogram, are displayed above the screen.
2. In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be
displayed depending on the situation.
3. The subprogram of each hierarchy is displayed on the history
display line.

1042
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

4. In additional information line near the bottom of the screen, the

following information is displayed for the program under the
cursor.
D program name (6 characters)
D symbol (16 characters), comment (30 characters)
D program size (6 characters)
5. In the Program List area, the programs 14 lines and 5 columns can
be displayed in maximum.
(b) Area of Program List
The following items are displayed in Program List area of Program
List Viewer screen.
The meanings of these items are the same as the items of Program List
Viewer screen (Detail).
D Program type.
D Status of protection
D Program name or symbol. (See ”Screen Setting for Program List
Viewer screen” section for selecting this item.)

7.1.4.3
Operations

1 hierarchy up Step Sequence Monitor screen

Displays subprogram Step sequence state screen Search subprogram Screen settings

Fig. 7.1.4.3 Soft keys of Subprogram List Viewer screen

(a) Operation with Soft–keys
1 [ZOOM] Display the contents of program
Changes to LADDER Diagram Monitor screen or Step Sequence
Monitor screen. If you press [ZOOM] soft key without strings, the
program under the cursor is displayed at LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen or Step Sequence Monitor screen.
If you entered program name or symbol before pressing [ZOOM]
soft key, the program according to the preceding string is searched
and the program is displayed at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
or Step Sequence Monitor screen.
But, when the selected program is protected to monitor, you have
to unlock the protection.
When it exceeds 8 hierarchies and [zoom] soft key is pushed, an
error message is displayed, and zoom doesn’t occur.
2 [BACK]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence Monitor
screen. in 1 hierarchy.

1043
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

3 [STEP]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence Monitor
screen.
4 [STATE]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence State screen.
5 [SEARCH] Search for program
Searches the program. If you entered program name or symbol and
press [SEARCH] soft key, the program according to the preceding
string is searched, the cursor points the program.
6 [SETING]
Goes to setting screen for Subprogram List Viewer screen. You can
change various settings for Subprogram List Viewer screen at the
screen. Use Return key [<] to return to Subprogram List Viewer
screen. See ”7.1.4.4 SETTING SCREEN” section for the detail.
7 [<]
The screen display is switched into the PMC Main menu.
(b) Other operations
1 Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change
keys.
And if you entered program name or symbol and press Right cursor
move key, the program according to the proceeding string is
searched, the cursor points the program.
2 INPUT key
You can operate same as [ZOOM] soft key.

7.1.4.4 The setting of the Subprogram List Viewer screen is common to the
Setting screen Program List Viewer screen. See ”3.3.4 SETTING SCREEN” of
”V.FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION” section for
the detail.

7.1.5 This screen is displayed when a cursor is put on the subprogram of

Ladder Diagram LADDER in the Program List Viewer screen, Subprogram List Viewer
screen, and Step Sequence Monitor screen, and [ZOOM] key is pushed.
Monitor Screen This screen is the same as ”3.1 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
SCREEN” of ”V.FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION”.
Refer to the explanation for the details of the screen.

7.1.6 This screen is the same as Collective Monitor screen of ”4.2 SCREEN
Collective Monitor CONFIGURATION” of ”V.FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7
MANIPULATION”. Refer to the explanation for the details of that screen.
Screen The hierarchy information of Step Sequence Monitorn is lost when
[JUMP]key is pushed on the Collective Monitor screen and jump to the
LADDER nets. When [<] key is pushed from the selected LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen, the Program List Viewer screen is displayed.

1044
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

7.2 These screens display the run status of each step of step sequence.
DISPLAYING RUN D STEP SEQUENCE STATE SCREEN (WHOLE)
D STEP SEQUENCE STATE SCREEN (SUB PROGRAM)
STATUS
D TIME MONITOR SETTING SCREEN
The screen structures shown in the following.

[LIST]
[<]
Program List
Step Sequence State
Viewer screen
Screen (Whole)
[STEP]
Time [MONIT]
Monitor [LIST] [ZOOM]
Setting
Screen [<]
[STEP]
Step Sequence State Step Sequence
Screen (Subprogram) Monitor Screen
[MONIT] [STATE]

[STATE] [SPLIST] [STEP] [SPLIST]

Subprogram List Viewer Screen

Fig. 7.2 Screen structures

7.2.1 Displayed by pushing [STATE] key on the Program List Viewer screen.
Step Sequence State The elapsed time and run status of all step sequense program is displayed.
Screen (Whole)

Fig. 7.2.1 Step Sequence State Screen (Whole)

(a) Screen Structure
1. STEP NO.
Displays a step number. The symbol information of the address of
that step number is displayed to the right.

1045
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

2. STATUS
When it is displayed with ”EXEC”, it means active. When it isn’t
displayed, it means inactive.
3. ELAPSE
The time when it is active state is displayed. The time is increasing
during active state.
4. MONITOR
It means that time monitor is settings.
In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be displayed
depending on the situation.
D T(x): monitoring timer number.
D OVER: an elapsed time is over monitoring time.

7.2.1.1
Operations

Search step Time Monitor Setting screen

Program List Viewer screen Reset of time monitor error

Fig. 7.2.1.1 Soft keys of Step Sequence State Screen (Whole)

(a) Operation with Soft–keys
1 [LIST] Goes to Program List Viewer screen
The screen display is switched into the Program List Viewer
screen.
2 [SEARCH] Search for step
Searches the step. If you entered step number or symbol and press
[SEARCH] soft key, the step according to the proceeding string is
searched, and the display is updated so that the step is displayed at
the top.
3 [RESET]
For all of monitoring steps, the error status, which occurred by the
monitoring function, is canceled. If you want to cancel it
independently, do a ”Deletion of monitor” on the Time Monitor
Setting screen.
4 [MONIT]
The screen display is switched into the Time Monitor Setting
screen.
5 [<]
The screen display is switched into the PMC Main menu.

1046
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

(b) Other operations

Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change keys.
And if you entered step number or symbol and press Right cursor
move key, the program according to the proceeding string is searched
and the cursor points the program.

7.2.2 This screen is displayed by pushing [STATE] key on the Subprogram List
Step Sequence State Viewer screen or Step Sequence Monitor screen.
The elapsed time and run status of currently selected step sequense
Screen (Subprogram) program is displayed.

Fig. 7.2.2 Step Sequence State Screen (Subprogram)

(a) Screen Structure
1. STEP NO.
Displays a step number. The symbol information of the address of
that step number is displayed to the right.
2. STATUS
When ”EXEC” is displayed, it means active. When it isn’t
displayed, it means inactive.
3. ELAPSE
The time elapsed after the step is in active state is displayed. The
time is increasing during active state.
4. MONITOR
It means that the time monitor settings is effective.
In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be displayed
depending on the situation.
D T(x): monitoring timer number
D OVER: an elapsed time is over monitoring time

1047
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

7.2.2.1
Operations

1 hierarchy up Step Sequence Monitor screen Reset of time monitor error

Subprogram List Viewer screen Search step Time Monitor Setting screen

Fig. 7.2.2.1 Soft keys of Step Sequence State Screen (Subprogram)

(a) Operation with Soft–keys
1 [BACK]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence Monitor
screen of one hierarchy upper. If it was displayed from Step
Sequence Monitor screen of the first hierarchy, the screen display
is switched into the Program List Viewer screen.
2 [SPLIST]
The screen display is switched into the Subprogram List Viewer
screen.
3 [STEP]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence Monitor
screen.
4 [SEARCH] Search for step
Searches the step. If you entered step number or symbol and press
[SEARCH] soft key, the step according to the proceeding string is
searched and the display is updated so that searched step may come
to the top.
5 [RESET]
For all of monitoring steps, the error status, which occurred by the
monitoring function, is canceled. If you want to cancel it
independently, do a ”Deletion of monitor” on the Time Monitor
Setting screen.
6 [MONIT]
The screen display is switched into the Time Monitor Setting
screen.
7 [<]
The screen display is switched into the PMC Main menu.
(b) Other operations
Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change keys.
If you entered step number or symbol and press Right cursor move key,
the step according to the proceeding string is searched and the cursor
points the program.

1048
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

7.3
TIME MONITOR

7.3.1 When an activated state remains set for longer than the specified time, the
Time Monitor Function state may be determined as being error. The elapsed time can be specified
for up to eight steps.
The following occurs when an activated state remains set for longer than
the specified time.
(1) ”OVER” is displayed at the corresponding step number on the Step
Sequence State Screen.
(2) Execution of the ladder continues.
(3) The bit of address R9118 which corresponds with the monitoring timer
number is set to ON. The processes for the error status can be program
by the ladder.
Timer Number Corresponding address

1 R9118.0

2 R9118.1

3 R9118.2

4 R9118.3

5 R9118.4

6 R9118.5

7 R9118.6

8 R9118.7

(4) The following message is displayed on the PMC alarm screen.

”ER48 STEP SEQUENCE TIME OVER(xxH)”
”xx” displays the content of address R9118 in hexadecimal code.

1049
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

7.3.2 This screen is displayed by pushing [MONIT] key on the Step Sequence
Time Monitor Setting State Screen. The time monitor function can be set on this screen. Move
the cursor with the cursor key, input a step number or monitor time, and
Screen set by pushing INPUT key.

Fig. 7.3.2 Time Monitor Setting Screen

(a) Meaning of display
Display Meaning

NO. Monitor timer number

T(1) : means monitor timer 1.

STEP NO. Step number and symbol

S0001: Step number
The right of the step number is symbol.

ELAPSE Actual elapsed time (per msec)

The time is increasing during active state.

MONITOR Monitor time (per msec)

(b) Operations
1 [DELETE]
The setting of the specified monitor number is deleted. Move a
cursor to a number to delete, and push [DELETE] key.
2 [<]
The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence State Screen.

1050
B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)

(c) Definition of monitor

(1) Position the cursor at the input position and input a step number (or
symbol).

Keyin ”S12” and push [INPUT] key.

(2) Position the cursor at the input position and define a monitor time.

Keyin ”100” and push [INPUT]key.

D The maximum number of monitors which can be set is eight.
D Cursor can be moved to ”STEP NO.” or ”MONITOR”.
D Maximum monitor time is 214748367msec. An error occurs if
you input value beyond it.
D An error occurs if monitor time is inputted without inputting a
step number.
D The same step number can’t be set.

1051
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15

(d) Definition of monitor

Position the cursor at the deletion and press [DELETE] key.
The settings of that number are deleted regardless of the cursor
position(”STEP NO.” or ”MONITOR”).
(e) Alteration of monitor
Position the cursor at the alteration position and input again.

7.4 Display the Ladder Diagram Editor screen from Program List Viewer
screen, Subprogram List Viewer screen, and Step Sequence Monitor
EDITING FUNCTION screen, by pushing [EDIT] key.
OF LADDER This screen is the same as ”5.1 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
DIAGRAM SCREEN” of ”V.FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION”.
Refer to the explanation for the details of that screen.

1052
VII. PMC PROGRAMMER
(SYSTEM P series)
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 1. GENERAL

1 GENERAL

The FANUC LADDER system can easily prepare sequence programs,

symbol data, titles, and message of PMC–SB and PMC–SC, and also
easily define addresses of the modules to be installed in an I/O unit by
using SYSTEM P series.
Major functions of this FANUC LADDER are as described below.
(1) Input, display and editing of sequence programs
(2) Transfer of sequence programs (including write into EPROM for
PMC or ROM module.)
(3) Collation of sequence programs
(4) Program error display
The SYSTEM P series is used in the stage of preparing a sequence
program only and separated from PMC after the sequence program has
been completed. The SYSTEM P series can be connected to PMC only
when the PMC is operated with the RAM card and cannot be connected
when PMC is operated with a EPROM for PMC or ROM module.

Series 16/18/20/21
Machine tool
/Power Mate–D

PMC card DI/DO card

System floppy loading

FANUC LADDER Paper tape input/output

PMC–SA1/SA2 PPR
SYSTEM P series List output
(FANUC LADDER)
PMC EPROM for PMC
WRITER input/output
FANUC LADDER
PMC–SB/SC or

FA EPROM for PMC

WRITER input/output

ROM for PMC

moduleinput/output

Floppy PRINTER
input/output
Sequence program figure output

Fig. 1

1055
2. FUNCTIONS OF
PROCESSING PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

2 FUNCTIONS OF PROCESSING

(1) Input of sequence programs

Input sequence programs using the following units when sequence
programs are loaded into the memory of the SYSTEM P series.
a) SYSTEM P series keyboard
b) PPR tape reader (paper tape)
c) Floppy
d) PMC memory
e) EPROM for PMC or ROM module
(2) Sequence program display
Sequence programs can be displayed on the 12” graphic display of
SYSTEM P series as follows.
a) Sequence programs can be displayed using mnemonic symbols.
b) Sequence programs can also be displayed in the ladder diagram
format.
(3) Editing of sequence programs
A sequence program can be edited by using the SYSTEM P series
keyboard in the following three ways.
a) Alteration
b) Insertion
c) Deletion
(4) Transfer of sequence programs
Sequence programs can be transferred as follows.
a) From SYSTEM P series memory to PMC memory
b) From PMC memory to SYSTEM P series memory
c) From SYSTEM P series memory to floppy
d) From floppy to SYSTEM P series memory
e) From SYSTEM P series memory to EPROM or ROM module for
PMC (Write into EPROM for PMC or ROM module)
f) From EPROM for PMC or ROM module to SYSTEM P series
memory
(5) Collation of sequence programs
Sequence programs can be checked by collating them between the
following memories.
a) SYSTEM P series memory – PMC memory
b) SYSTEM P series memory – floppy
c) SYSTEM P series memory – EPROM for PMC or ROM module
d) SYSTEM P series memory – paper tape

1056
 2. FUNCTIONS OF
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) PROCESSING

(6) Hard copy

a) Since FANUC PPR is connectable to SYSTEM P series, the
paper tape output and list output (mnemonic symbol) are
obtainable.
b) A ladder diagram can be printed out.
(7) Program error display
Sequence program errors are displayed on the screen of the SYSTEM
P series.
Error codes are displayed at the lower right of the screen as
ALARM=XXX.
Refer to list of error codes in Appendix.

1057
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

3 COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS

1058
 3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS

3.1 (1) SYSTEM P series

COMPONENT UNITS This system serves as a programmer to generate and edit sequence
programs.
(2) Series 16
This system transfers a generated sequence program to CNC.
(3) FANUC PPR
This PPR inputs/outputs a sequence program by using a paper tape,
and also output a source list to the printer.
(4) FANUC printer
This printer prints out the sequence program.
(5) FANUC PMC writer
This unit is used for writing a sequence program to the EPROM for
PMC or ROM module when the sequence program has been
completed.
(6) FANUC FA Writer
This unit is used for writing data to the EPROM or ROM module for
the PMC after a sequence program has been created.

1059
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

3.2 For details of the connections of SYSTEM P series unit power supply,
PPR, and other units as well as their operation, refer to the following
CONNECTIONS OF operator’s manuals.
UNITS
SYSTEM P–G Mark II: B–66014E
SYSTEM P–G Mate: B–66003E
This chapter mainly describes the connections between SYSTEM P series
and I/O devices.

Fig. 3.2 (a) External view of SYSTEM P Mark II

1060
 3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS

Fig. 3.2 (b) External view of SYSTEM P Mate

Since a volatile RAM is employed as the SYSTEM P series memory, all

programs (FANUC LADDER system programs and sequence program)
being loaded into memory are operation should be started with the input
of FANUC LADDER system programs (called system loading).
If the SYSTEM P series power supply is turned off halfway in the curse
of inputting a sequence program from the keyboard, the sequence
program must be stored in advance, and this FANUC LADDER provides
an output function to a floppy for this purpose.

1061
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

FANUC ROM WRITER (FANUC PMC WRITER)

Adaptor for
ROM modules

(FANUC FA WRITER)

Rear panel of the SYSTEM P EPROM for

Mark II Adaptor for the PMC
1M–bit EPROMs

CN2 CN1
EPROM for the PMC CN4 CN3

Adaptor for 40–pin

ROMs
FANUC PPR
1 Tape input
ROM module
PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC 2 Tape printout
for the PMC
3 List output

FANUC PRINTER

Prints sequence program

figures.

Fig. 3.2 (c) Connection of SYSTEM P series with each unit

(1) Connect FANUC PPR to connector CN1.

(2) Connect FANUC PMC writer or FANUC FA writer to connector
CN2.
(3) Connect FANUC printer to connector CN3.
(4) Connect connector CN4 to PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SB2/SC. It is
connected to a channel preset by a PMC I/O.
For details, refer to ”Setting and display of I/O in PMC programmer
(CRT/MDI) in III”.
Connector JD5A on MAIN PCB ³ 1 CHANNEL
Connector JD5B on MAIN PCB ³ 2 CHANNEL

1062
 3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS

3.3 Figs. 3.3(a) – (b) show the panel of the SYSTEM P series keyboard.
KEYBOARD OF It is not necessary to memorize the meanings of keys on the keyboard.
SYSTEM P SERIES Descriptions of these keys and menus are displayed on the SYSTEM P
series screen by operation, and you can easily operate the SYSTEM P
series board while monitoring the SYSTEM P series screen.
In this chapter, you should understand an outline of functions of these
keys.

Soft keys

Function keys

Function keys
Numeric keypad

Standard keyboard

Fig. 3.3 (a) Panel of the SYSTEM P Mark II key board

Function keys

Data input keys

Fig. 3.3 (b) Panel of the SYSTEM P Mate key board

1063
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

3.3.1 This key is used to load the FANUC LADDER system program into the
LOAD Key (System SYSTEM P series memory through a floppy disk at the first time after
turning on power.
Program Loading Key)

3.3.2 F key is used to select an I/O device among I/O devices connected at that
F Keys (F1 to F0) time.
These F keys are provided with an LED. When depressing a key, the LED
lights, and when depressing the key once more, the LED goes out. The
lighting condition of of this LED indicates that an I/O has been
designated. No I/O device is operable when its corresponding LED is not
lighting.
The correspondence between F keys and I/O devices is as shown below.
(I) shows an input, while (O) shows an output.
(1) <F1> key: FANUC PPR paper tape reader (I)
(2) <F2> key: Floppy disk input (I)
(3) <F3> key: Not used
(4) <F4> key: Display of ladder diagram on SYSTEM P series screen
(O)
(5) <F5> key: FANUC PPR printer (O)
(6) <F6> key: FANUC PPR paper tape puncher (O)
(7) <F7> key: Floppy disk output (O)
(8) <F8> key: PMC–PA1/PA2/SA1/SA2/SB/SB2/SC (I/O)
(9) <F9> key: FANUC PMC writer, FANUC FA writer (I/O)
(10) <F10> key: FANUC printer (O)
(The ladder diagram is printed on the printer.)
(11) <F13> key: FANUC Floppy Cassette/FANUC FA Card adapter (I)
(12) <F14> key: FANUC Floppy Cassette/FANUC FA Card adapter
(O)
Combination of F key and menu number of FANUC LADDER decided
which function is to be executed.

1064
 3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS

3.3.3 Four R keys <R0> to <R3> are provided. The meaning of these keys differ
R Keys (R0 to R3) according to the screen conditions at their operating time, even in case of
the same key.
(1) R key menu screen
This screen is obtained just after loading a FANUC LADDER system
program (1/2) or when pressing <NL> key only in a menu screen.
Refer to Fig. 4.2.4.
<R0> FANUC ladder start.
. A menu screen appears.
<R1> Editing a ladder diagram starts.
<R2> Not used in FANUC ladder. (Not accepted when pressing
these keys)
<R3> Request key (see 4.8)
Press NL keys, if a wrong key was pressed by mistake. The screen is
reset to the condition before pressing the wrong R key.
(2) Other than R key menu screen
<R0> This key operation is accepted when EDIT is displayed at the
lower left part of the screen (called EDIT screen hereafter)
during sequence program editing. The screen is switched to
the sequence program, symbol, message, I/O module, and
title, each time this R key is pressed.
<R1> 1 When this key is pressed during printing of a ladder
diagram on an external printer, the printer stops every page
to be ready for key entry.
2 When this key is pressed during data transfer between
SYSTEM P series and PMC–SB/SC, data transfer is
stopped.
3 The signal display in a sequence program is alternately
selected to symbols and addresses, each time this R1 is
pressed during the display of the sequence program on the
screen.
<R2> Data on the last page are displayed, each time this key is
pressed on the EDIT screen.
<R3> 1 Data on the next page are displayed, each time this key is
pressed on the EDIT screen.
2 Transfer is aborted when this key is pressed during ROM
data transfer between SYSTEM P series and
PMC–WRITER or floppy.

1065
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

3.3.4 Data keys are used to enter data. To switch the output of such keys
Data Keys and Screen between the upper character and lower–character, use the [SHIFT] key or
[LOCK] key. Pressing the [SHIFT] key together with an arbitrary key
Scroll Key changes the output of the arbitrary key to the upper character, and pressing
the [LOCK] key changes the output of all keys to upper character. To
release the upper character mode, press the [LOCK] key again.
Special keys are described below.
(1) <NL> key
Data entry from the SYSTEM P series keyboard are input into
SYSTEM P series by depressing <NL> key.
Two <NL> keys are located on the keyboard for easily operation.
(2) <CAN> key
Data being entered from the keyboard are cancelled.
(3) <BS> key
Data being entered from the keyboard are sequentially deleted
leftward, each time this key is depressed.
(4) Arrow keys <°> <±> <²> <³>
These keys are accepted only when a ladder diagram is being
displayed on the screen, and used for scrolling the ladder diagram.

NOTE
None of [INS] [DEL] [CHG] [AUX] keys and K key is employable
in the FANUC LADDER.

1066
 3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS

3.4 (1) SYSTEM P series Mate

SETTING OF I/O An initial I/O device setting of ’FANUC LADDER’ for SYSTEM P
series Mate is as follows.
DEVICE
Table 3.4(a) FANUC LADDER (Mate) of table

Channel I/O device F key

CN1 PMC–RAM F8
CN2 PMC WRITER F9
FA WRITER
CN3 External printer F10

Alter the setting of the I/O device by under–mentioned ’IO command’

when using FANUC PPR.

(Setting method of IO i) Press the R3 key in the menu screen of R keys.

command) ’REQUEST =’ is displayed in the left bottom of screen and
becomes the state which can be typed in.
ii) Type in IO PPR, CN1 <NL>.
PPR is allocated to channel 1.
iii) Type in as follows when channel 1 allocation is returned to
PMC–RAM.
IO, NC, CN1, F8, BR10 <NL>
(2) SYSTEM P Mark II
The initial setting of I/O devices of FANUC LADDER for the
SYSTEM P Mark II is as follows.

Table 3.4(b) FANUC LADDER (Mark II)

Channel I/O device F key

CN1 FANUC PPR F1, F5, F6
CN2 PMC WRITER F9
FA WRITER
CN3 External printer F10
CN4 PMC–RAM F8

(3) When a FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card adapter is used,

change the setting of the I/O device by executing the following I/O
command:
i) Press the [R3] key on the menu screen for the [R] keys.
Then REQUEST = appears at the lower left of the screen allowing
data to be entered.
ii) Type IO BCA, CN2, F13, F14, then press the <NL> key. The
FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card adapter is allocated to
channel 2.
iii) To initialize the setting of channel 2 again, type IO AUX, CN2,
F9, then press the <NL> key.
(4) Setting of the ROM writer
The PMC–SA1, –SA2 or –SB uses one of 1MB EPROM (27C1024).
The PMC–SC uses one of ROM module (128KB, 256KB, or
512KB).

1067
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND
CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

For this reason, when the PMC–SA1, –SA2 or –SB is used, both the
FA Writer and PMC Writer can be used. When the PMC–SC is used,
only the FA Writer is available.
When the PMC–SA1, –SA2 or –SB is used, the ROM writer used can
be selected on the REQUEST screen as follows.
1 On the REQUEST screen, enter WRITER then press the <NL> key.
2 The following message appears. To select the FA Writer, enter 0
or press the <NL> key. To select the PMC Writer, enter 1.
SET KIND OF ROM WRITER (0:FA WRITER, 1:PMC
WRITER)
WRITER=
The current setting of the ROM writer can be checked on the system
parameter screen.
(1) PMC Writer
The PMC Writer is required when the PMC–SA1, –SA2, –SB or
SB2 is available. To use a 1MB EPROM (27C1024), the 1M
EPROM adapter (A13B0147–B001) is required. Set the
EPROM select switch to the 271024 position before using the 1M
EPROM adapter.
(2) FA Writer
When the FA Writer is used with the PMC–SA1, –SA2 or –SB,
the EPROM adapter (1MB) for the FA Writer is required. When
the FA writer is used with the PMC–RC, the ROM module
adapter is required.

1068
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4 OPERATION

1069
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.1 Various operations of FANUC ladder are done onthe specified screen.
GENERAL Fig. 4.1 shows the relation between various operations and corresponding
screens.

Power on SYSTEM P series power on

SYSTEM P Visual identification characters

FANUC ladder system floppy loading

FANUC ladder
system loading

Visual identification characters

FANUC ladder
R key menu screen
R0, R1, R2, R3

Key–in NL Key–in R3 Key–in R0 Key–in R1 Key–in R2

Ladder diagram
REQUEST= Parameter screen Unused
direct editing

Key–in NL 00 or NL key–in

Menu screen

01 key–in 02 key–in 03 key–in 04 key–in 05 key–in 06 key–in 07 key–in 08 key–in 09 key–in 10 key–in

Edit Source ROM Source ROM Source ROM Unused Clear Parame-
screen program program program program program program screen ter set-
input input output output verify verify ting
screen screen screen screen screen screen screen
(PTR, (FD, (PTP, FD, (FD, (PTR, (FD,
FD, KB) RAM PRT) RAM FD) RAM
cassette) cassette) cassette)

E NL key–in

00 or NL key–in after
E NL key–in when an alarm occurred or when parameter set–ting.
processing was aborted halfway.
Automatic return when processing has been
terminated normally.

Fig. 4.1 (a) Relation between various operations and screens

1070
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

START

SYSTEM P power
on

Load system floppy

Set necessary system parameters.

Sequence program input, title,

symbol, comment, message
I/O module

Editing

Debug using PMC–RAM

NO
Is dedug
completed?

YES

Write a sequence program into

EPROM for PMC or ROM
module

SYSTEM P series
power off

Operate the system after loading

EPROM for PMC or ROM module
to CNC

END

Fig. 4.1 (b) Outline of operation

1071
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.2
PREPARATION
BEFORE OPERATION

4.2.1 The system floppy disk contains the system of FANUC LADDER for
System Floppy PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SB2/SC.

4.2.2 To apply the FANUC LADDER system for PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SB2/SC

Limitations with the to the SYSTEM P Mate will overlay each of the following functions.
SYSTEM P Mate D The function to display the ladder diagram on the screen and output it
on an external printer, which is operated using the menu numbers 03 and
F4 or 04 to F10.
D The function to input/output the ROM formatted program and make its
comparison, which is operated combining the menu numbers 03, 05 or
07 and F2, F7, F8, F9, F13 or F14.
D Ladder diagram direct editing, which is operated by pressing <R1> key
on the R key menu screen and executing ladder diagram direct editing.
The SYSTEM P Mate has less memory than the SYSTEM P Mark II and
cannot load the system program on the system floppy disk at a time. The
remainder left unloaded will be loaded automatically when each of the
functions above is used. However, only in the case the system floppy disk
has not been installed into the drive, the message “MOUNT SYSTEM
FLOPPY DISK” is displayed as follows:
SET SYSTEM FD & KEY I ’OK’ OR ’NO’
FDD =OK ODRIVEJ (VOL =01)
FDD =
Install the system floppy disk into the drive #0 or #1 and key in ’OK 0’
or ’OK 1’. If the system floppy disk is installed into the drive #0, it is
possible to key in only ’OK’ without specifying the drive number.

4.2.3 FANUC LADDER system programs are loaded into the floppy. Also,
Loading of Floppy sequence programs can be written from SYSTEM P series into the floppy
or input from the floppy.
The loading method of the floppy is described in detail in the operator’s
manual for SYSTEM P series.
The following describes the loading direction of the floppy.
Loading direction of floppy

1072
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

Drive No. 0

Drive No. 1

CRT

Fig. 4.2.3 Loading direction of floppy

4.2.4 (1) Turn on the SYSTEM P series power supply.

FANUC LADDER (2) Set the system floppy or prepared exclusive system floppy into the
System Floppy floppy disk.
Loading (3) Continue depressing <LOAD> key for 2 to 3 seconds on the
keyboard.
(4) The system loading is started. After this system loading, ”FAPT
LADDER” is displayed on the CRT screen and R key menu also
appears.
This R key menu screen is shown in Fig. 4.2.4.
After this screen is displayed, take out system floppy or exclusive
system floppy.

Fig. 4.2.4 R key menu screen

1073
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.2.5 A programmer menu screen (hereinafter called menu screen) is displayed

Programmer Menu by pressing <R0> key from the R key menu screen. Key in a menu number
to be executed Fig. 4.2.5 shows the menu screen.
Screen
The parameter setting screen is displayed by pressing <R0> key just after
loading the 1/2 system floppy.
Set parameters as required, referring to 4.2.6.
Proceed to the menu screen by pressing <NL> key.
Parameters are displayable and settable from the menu screen, too.
Programmer menu screen (The programmer menu and function keys are
displayed.)
The following figure shows the screen to be displayed when the
programmer key (R0) is pressed.
The programmer menu, function keys with I/O indication, and statuses
are displayed on this screen.

SET I/O KEY & KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT.

NO. ITEMS
01 EDIT LADDER PROGRAM.
02 INPUT LADDER PROGRAM FROM PTR OR FD.
03 INPUT ROM DATA FROM FD, PMC–RAM OR ROM.
04 OUTPUT LADDER PROGRAM TO PTP. FD OR PRINTER.
05 OUTPUT ROM DATA TO FD, PMC–RAM OR ROM.
06 COMPARE LADDER PROGRAM WITH PTR OR FD.
07 COMPARE ROM DATA WITH FD, PMC–RAM OR ROM.
Capacity of area
08 (UNUSED) used for symbols
09 CLEAR OF TITLE, SYMBOL, LADDER OR MESSAGE DATA. and comment data

10 PARAMETER SET. A period of the

00 END EDIT & DISPLAY. sequence program

F1 : PTR (I) . F4 : GRP (O) SYMBOL =00.0KB SCAN TIME=OOOMS Capacity of a

ladder program
F2 : FD (I) . F10 : FPRT (O) LADDER =00.0KB
F5 : PRT (O) MESSAGE=00.0KB Capacity of
message data
F6 : PTP (O) ROM MODULE=A
The number of the
F7 : FD (O) END SEQ.NO=00000 last step in the
F8 : PMC (I/O) ERR SEQ.NO=00000 sequence program

F9 : ROM (I/O) ERR BLOCK =00000 ALARM=00 The number of a

step at which an
error occurred
The number of an
error occurred
NO. =
The number of
blocks in which an
error was detected
Enter a menu number.

Fig. 4.2.5 Programmer menu screen

1074
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.2.6 Set parameters before inputting a sequence program without fail. Set
Parameter Setting and necessary parameters by changing from the menu screen to the parameter
setting screen (Fig.4.2.6), provided that the parameter setting screen is
Display automatically displayed just after loading the system floppy.
(Operation in step 1 is not required in the procedure below.)
1 Key in menu number “10 <NL>” from the menu screen.
Turn off all F keys. The screen is switched, and the parameter setting
screen shown in Fig. 4.2.6 is displayed.
The initial value of each parameter is as shown in Fig. 4.2.6.

KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT TO SET PARA,S.

NO. ITEMS CURRENT PARAMETERS

01 (UNUSED) ;
02 COUNTER DATA TYPE ; BINARY
03 OPERATOR PANEL ; NO
KEY/LED ADDRESS ; /
KEY/LED BIT IMAGE ADRS. ; /
04 PMC TYPE ; PMC–RC
05 LANGUAGE ORIGIN ; 000000H
06 (UNUSED) ;
07 LADDER EXEC. ; 100% (1–150%)
08 (UNUSED) ;
09 IGNORE DIVIDE CODE ; NO
10 (UNUSED) ;
00 NOTHING TO SET
; ROM WRITER=FA WRITER
NO.=

Fig. 4.2.6 Parameter setting screen (PMC–RC)

2 Key in “00 <NL>” to proceed to the menu screen, if displayed

parameters are employed as they are.
3 Set parameters according to the following procedure when it is
necessary to change the displayed parameters.
No operation is required for an item in which no change is required.
a) Set a counter data type. The initial value is set to the binary
format.
1 Key in “02 <NL>”
2 Select a binary or BCD notation, and key in the
corresponding number “@@<NL>”.
b) OPERATOR PANEL
Specifies whether the operator’s panel is used.
The initial value is already set to NO (unused).
1 Enter 03 and press the <NL> key.
2 The following message appears at the lower left of the screen.
EXAMPLE 0:NO, 1:YES
OP PANEL=
3 To disable the operator’s panel, enter 0 and press the <NL>
key. To enable the operator’s panel, enter 1 and press the
<NL> key.

1075
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4 Selecting YES in step 3 displays the following message:

SET KEY/LED ADDRESS (KEY ADRS, LED ADRS.)
ADDR=
5 Enter a Y–address to specify the KEY address and a
Y–address to specify the LED address. For example, enter
X0,Y0 and press the <NL> key.
6 Entering data as shown above displays the following
message:
SET KEY/LED IMAGE ADDRESS (KEY ADRS, LED
ADRS.)
ADDR=
7 Enter addresses other than X– and F–addresses. For
example, enter R0,R10 and press the <NL> key.
c) Select the type of PMC.
The initial value has been set to the PMC–SB or –SA1.
1 Type 04 and press the <NL> key.
2 The following message appears at the lower left of the screen:
EXAMPLE 0:PMC–RB, 1:PMC–RC
PMC TYPE=
or
EXAMPLE 0:PMC–RA1, 1:PMC–RA2
PMC TYPE=
3 To select the PMC–SB or –SA1, enter 0 and press the <NL>
key. To select the PMC–SC or –SA2, enter 1 and press the
<NL> key.
4 When the type of PMC is changed, all data items including
ladder data are cleared. The following message is displayed
for confirmation:
CLEAR ALL DATA TO CHANGE PMC TYPE (0:NO,
1:YES)
CLEAR/KEEP=
5 To cancel changing the type of the PMC, enter 0 and press the
<NL> key. To change the type of the PMC, enter 1 and press
the <NL> key.
d) LANGUAGE ORIGN (for PMC–SC only)
The initial value is already set to 0.
1 Enter 05 and press the <NL> key.
2 Enter @@@@@@ (hexadecimal) and press the <NL> key
to specify the first address of the TCB in a C program.
e) LADDER EXEC (only for PMC–SC)
The parameter value for LADDER EXEC is fixed to 100% for the
PMC–RB. For the PMC–RC, the parameter value can be set as
follows.
1 key in “07 <NL>”.
2 Key in “@@@ <NL>” by numeric characters within a range
of 1% to 150%.
After setting, key in “00 <NL>” or “<NL>” to set the menu screen.
This parameter is not supported for PMC–SA1, PMC–SA2,
PMC–SB or PMC–SB2.

1076
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

f) IGNORE DIVIDE CODE (only for PMC–SB/SC)

It is possible to select whether to execute a ladder program by
dividing it into smaller units or without dividing it.
This parameter can be specified as follows for PMC–SB and
PMC–SC:
1 Enter 09 and press the <NL> key.
2 To execute the ladder program by dividing it into smaller
units, enter 0 and press the <NL> key. To execute it without
dividing it, enter 1 and press the <NL> key.
This parameter is not supported for PMC–SA1 or PMC–SA2.
The ladder program is always executed without being divided.

1077
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.3
PROGRAM EDITING

4.3.1 Display the EDIT screen by keying in ”1 <NL>” from the menu screen.
Data Display and Press <R0> by necessary times until a desired screen appears from the title
to I/O module. The screen is switched in the sequence shown in Fig.
Setting (Title, Symbol, 4.3.1, each time <R0> key is pressed.
Ladder Program,
Comment, Message, Individual screens are reset to the menu screen by ”E <NL>”. In this
paragraph, only the input and editing operation of each data from the
I/O Module)
keyboard is described.
For the I/O operations using a paper tape or a floppy, see 4.4 and 4.5.
(1) Title data (title data list screen).
Set the following data on sequence program as a comment.

Menu screen Key in ’1 NL ’

EDIT screen
Ladder program list R0
screen
R0

Symbol & comment list

Title data list screen
screen

R0
R0
I/O module data list Message data list
screen screen
R0

Fig. 4.3.1 (a) Switching sequence of data display screen

*** TITLE DATA LIST ***

01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME
02 MACHINE TOOL NAME
03 PMC & NC NAME FANUC PMC–MODEL RB & F16MA
04 PMC PROGRAM NO.
05 EDITION NO.
06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.
07 DATE OF PROGRAMMING
08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
09 ROM WRITTEN BY
10 REMARKS

PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : 4061 EDITION : 01

MEMORY USED : 00.0 KBYTE SCAN TIME : 008 MSEC

0003 ALTERED
EDIT

Fig. 4.3.1 (b) Title data list screen

1078
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

a) MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME

Set the machine tool builder name (max. 32 characters).
Key in “A1 @@@..........@@@ NL”.

Machine tool builder name to be set

Example) “A1 ***MACHINE(LTD) NL”
b) MACHINE TOOL NAME
Set the machine tool name (max. 32 characters).
Key in “A2 @@@..........@@@ NL”.

Machine tool name to be set

Example) ”A2 ***MACHINE NL”
c) CNC & PMC NAME
Set the CNC and PMC name (max. 32 characters).
Key in “A3 @@@..........@@@ NL”.

NC and PMC name to be set

Example) “A3 F16MA.&.PMC–N NL”
d) PMC PROGRAM NO.
Set the sequence program number (max. 4 characters).
Key in “A4 @@@@ NL”.

Number to be set
Example) “A4 0001 NL”
e) EDITION NO.
Set the edition number (max. 2 characters).
Key in “A5 @@ NL”.

Edition number to be set

Example) “A5 G NL”
f) PROGRAM DRAWING NO.
Set the sequence program drawing number (max. 32 characters).
Key in “A6 @@@...........@@@ NL”.

Drawing number to be set

Example) “A6 0001–0002–000A NL”
g) DATE OF PROGRAMMING
Set the sequence programming date (max. 16 characters).
Key in “A7 @@..........@@ NL”.

Date to be set
Example) “A7 1990.10.23 NL”

1079
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

h) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
Set the sequence program designer name (max. 32 characters).
Key in “A8 @@@..........@@@ NL”.

Name to be set
Example) “A8 MR.***&MISS *** NL”
i) ROM WRITTEN BY
Set the name of the programmer who wrote a program into ROM
cassette (max. 32 characters).
Key in “A9 @@@..........@@@ NL”.

Name to be set
Example) “A9 MR.***&MISS *** NL”
j) REMARKS
Set remarks (memo) (max. 32 characters).
Key in “A10 @@..........@@ NL”.

Remarks to be set
Example) “A10 MEMO–COMMENT NL”
Set title data about all items in the above format for both entry and
alteration.
All characters are settable so long as they can be keyed in from
the SYSTEM P series keyboard. Set easy–to–understand data
about individual items.
(2) Symbol and comment data (SYMBOL & COMMENT LIST screen).
A symbol means a signal name to be attached to each PMC I/O signal.
The comment data is a comment statement of the signal name.
The symbol is optionally settable within maximum 6 characters,
while the comment data are optionally settable within maximum 30
characters.
a) Input from keyboard (Insert)
Key in “G0.1 SYMNAM COMMENT NL”.

Comment data
Symbol name
Address

Mode selection(IS..., AS...) and line selection (I..., A...) need not
be specified when symbols or comment data are input or edited.
Also addresses (G, F, X, Y,...) can be entered in any sequence.
b) Alter
The operation is completely the same as that described in 2) a).
c) Insert
The operation is completely the same as that described in 2) a).

1080
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

d) Delete
i) Delete every line
Key in “D@@@ NL”.

Line number to be deleted

ii) Sequential delete
Key in “D@@@@,@@@ NL”.
Delete end line number
Delete start line number
e) Search
i) Search by line number
Key in “L@@@@ NL”.

Line number to be searched

ii) Search by symbol name
Key in “L@@@@ SYMNAM NL”.
Symbol name to be searched
Line number with which the search is to
be started
iii) Address search
Key in “L@@@@ F0.1 NL”.
Address to be searched
Line number with which the search is to
be started
(3) Message data (MESSAGE DATA LIST screen)
Message data are alarm and operator message data to be displayed by
using functional instruction DISPB (SUB 41).

***MESSAGE DATA LIST***

0001 A00.0 0123456··········89XY Message data
0002 ABCD······
Line number 0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009 A00.1
·
Address ·
·
EDIT =

Fig. 4.3.1 (c) Message data list screen

Maximum 255 characters are entered to one address as message data.
Input message data every maximum 32 characters/line by dividing
them into 8 lines.

1081
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

a) Input and alter from keyboard

Set message data in the alter format for both entry and alter. All
characters are settable so long as they can be keyed in from the
SYSTEM P series keyboard.
Key in message data every line in the following format.
“A @@@ MESSAGE–DATA1 NL”.
Message data (maximum 32 characters)
Line number (maximum 3 digits)

A means alter.
b) Delete
Delete message data every line in the following format.
Key in “D@@@ NL”.

Line number to be deleted

c) Search
Search message data by address.
“A@@.@ NL”

Address of message data to be searched

(4) I/O module data (I/O MODULE DATA LIST screen)
I/O module data are used for determining addresses in a sequence
program of each I/O module.

***I/O MODULE DATA LIST***

ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME
X000
X001
X002
X003
·
·
·
·

Fig. 4.3.1 (d) I/O module data list screen

a) Input and alter from keyboard
Set I/O module data in the following format when inputting or
altering them from the keyboard.
Key in I/O module data in the format of:
“@@@ @ @ @@ @@@@@ NL”
I/O module name
(maximum 5 digits)
Slot number (maximum 2 digits within
a range of 1 to 10)
Base number (1 digit within a range of 0 to 3)
Group number (1 digit within a range of 0 to 15)
Address (input X0, Y0, ...)

1082
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

b) Delete
Delete I/O module data every address by specifying it as follows:
Key in “@@@@ NL”.
Address of I/O module data to be deleted
(input X0, Y0, ...)

CAUTION
1 If the same slot number is specified when the group and base numbers are equal to each
other, alarm No. 88 occurs.
2 If an output module is specified at an input address or an input module is specified at an
output address, alarm No. 87 occurs.
3 If a module is set doubly to a preset address, alarm No. 81 occurs.
Example) When two IO modules, b are set as shown in the following figure;

address group base slot name

a.

X000 2 0 1 FS08A
X001 2 0 1 FS08A
If an attempt is made to set a module to X014 like c., alarm No. 88 oc-
X002 2 0 1 FS08A
curs due to the reason in 1).
X003 2 0 1 FS08A
X004 2 0 1 FS08A
X005 2 0 1 FS08A
d.
X006 2 0 1 FS08A If an attempt is made to set an output module to X006 like d., alarm
No. 87 occurs due to the reason in 2).
X007 2 0 1 FS08A

X008 b.

X009 2 1 8 ID16C
X010 2 1 8 ID16C

X011 If an attempt is made to set input module ID32B to X006 like d., alarm
No. 81 occurs due to the reason in 3). In this case, this input module
X012 must be set after deleting a. and b. modules once.

X013
X014 c.
2 1 8 ID16C
X015 2 1 8 ID16C

The module names (FS08A, CT01A, etc.) used for input and output in common are out of the objects
of check in 1) and 2).

1083
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.3.2 Input a sequence program from the keyboard.

Programming from Set the EDIT screen (LADDER PROGRAM LIST screen).
Keyboard Press menu number ”1 <NL>” on the menu screen, or press <R0> key on
the symbol or I/O module screen. Turn off all F keys at this time.
Key in ”IS0 <NL>” (Insert Succession) to set the sequential insert mode,
and then, input a sequence program.
”*IS MODE*” is displayed at the lower right part of the screen. key in
desired instructions sequentially in the following format.

(Key in sequence) 1 IS0 <NL> (Sequential input start command)

³ *IS MODE* is displayed at the lower right part of the screen.
2 R X0.1 <NL>
3 W R1.1 <NL>
4 IE <NL> (Sequential input end command)
³ *IS MODE* display disappears from the lower right part of the
screen.

NOTE
1 Instructions to be keyed in are entered by abbreviated
symbols as shown above for the purpose of preventing a
key–in failure and improving the operability by reducing the
number of key–in times. It is also allowable to input these
instructions by using their full names, like ”RD X0.1 <NL>”.
Table 4.3.2 shows the correspondence between
abbreviated symbols and full names.
2 No severe format checking is performed for mnemonic
program. For example, the following program may be
correct with mnemonic programming.
However this program cannot be displayed as ladder
diagram nor printed out on the printer.

Usually do not program as shown below:

Wrong program

1084
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

Table 4.3.2 Keyboard input format and screen display format

Input format from keyboard Display format on screen

(Simple symbol) (Full name)
R X0. 1 RD X0. 1
RN X0. 2 RD. NOT X0. 2
RNS X0. 3 RD.NOT.STK X0. 3
W R0. 4 WRT R0. 4
WN R0. 5 WRT.NOT R0.5
O Y1. 0 OR Y1. 0
ON Y1. 1 OR.NOT Y1.1
OS OR. STK
AG2. 0 AND G2. 0
AN G2. 1 AND.NOT G2. 1
AS AND. STK
T 5 TMR 5
D F0 DEC F0
S 5 SUB 5
P 1234 (Parameter)

4.3.3 Correct a generated sequence program by alter operation.

Alter Set the EDIT screen (LADDER PROGRAM LIST screen) first and
display the generated source program. Turn off all F keys at this time.
a) Alter every instruction
Key in “A@@@@@ R X0.1 NL”
Instruction to be altered
Line number of the instruction to be altered
(maximum 5 digits)
A means alter.
b) Sequential alter
i) Key in ”AS@@@@@ NL” (Alter Succession) to set the
sequential alter mode.
@@@@@: Line number to be sequentially altered (maximum
5 digits) “AS MODE” is displayed at the lower right part of the
screen.
ii) Instructions are sequentially altered starting with the Line
specified by @@@@@, each time the key–in operation is done
in the “R X0.1 <NL>” format.
iii) After sequential alter, key in “AE <NL>” (Alter End).
Example) Example of sequential alter of sequence program
For altering all step numbers 20 to 23;
(Key in sequence)
1 AS20 <NL> (Sequential alter start
command)
³ *AS MODE* is displayed at the
lower right part of screen.
00020 RD Y0.1 2 R Y0.1 <NL>

1085
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

00021 WRT R0.1 3 W R0.1 <NL>

00022 RD F1.1 4 R Y1.2 <NL>
00023 WRT R1.1 5 W R1.2 <NL>
6 AE <NL> (Sequential alter end
command)
³ *AS MODE* display disappears
from the lower right part of the
screen.
c) Wiring change function
All of address used in Ladder Program is changed to a new
address independently of a command. Only bit address can be
changed.
Type in ’CA Address 1 Address 2 <NL>
(Symbol can not be changed)
A new address
A previous address to be changed
Abbreviation of CHANGE ALL
Example) ’CA R0.1 R1.2 <NL>’
— All ”R0.1” used in Ladder Program is changed
to ”R1.2”.

CAUTION
If an address is specified which can not be changed to a new
address, an alarm 09 occurs when the specified line will be
changed. In that case, previous lines correctly changed to
that line can be acceptable.

1086
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

00001 SUB1 00001 SUB1

00002 RD X0.1 00002 RD X1.7
00003 WRT R1.3 00003 WRT R1.2
00004 RD R1.2 00004 RD R1.2
00005 WRT R1.3 00005 WRT R1.3
00006 RD X0.1 00006 RD X1.7
00007 WRT R1.4 00007 WRT R1.4
00008 RD R1.3 00008 RD R1.2
00009 SUB 8 00009 SUB 8
00010 1111 00010 1111
00011 1111 00011 1111
00012 X0 00012 X0
This does not apply to byte address.
00013 R2 00013 R2
00014 SUB 2 00014 SUB 2
00015 SUB 48 00015 SUB 48

‘CA X0.1 X1.7 NL ’

EDIT= _ EDIT= _
Normal end of changing.
i. ii. iii.
00001 SUB1 00001 SUB1 00001 SUB1
00002 RD X0.1 00002 RD X0.1 00002 RD R1.2
00003 WRT R1.5 00003 WRT R1.5 00003 WRT R1.5
00004 RD R1.2 00004 RD X0.1 00004 RD R1.2
00005 WRT R1.3 00005 WRT R1.3 00005 WRT R1.3
00006 RD X0.1 00006 RD X0.1 00006 RD R1.2
00007 WRT R1.2 00007 WRTR1.2 00007 WRT R1.2
00008 RD R1.2 00008 RD R1.2 00008 RD R1.2
00009 SUB 8 00009 SUB 8 00009 SUB 8
00010 1111 00010 1111 00010 1111
00011 1111 00011 1111 00011 1111
00012 R1 00012 R1 00012 R1
00013 R2 00013 R2 00013 R2
00014 SUB 2 00014 SUB 2 00014 SUB 2
00015 SUB 48 00015 SUB 48 00015 SUB 48

EDIT= _ EDIT= _ EDIT= _

Abnormal end of Normal end of

changing. changing?
1 ‘CA R1.2 X0.1 NL’ Alarm No. 09 2 ‘CA X0.1 R1.2 NL’

As shown above, an alarm No. 09 occurs when a ladder program i is

changed by an operation of 1 and a ladder program ii will be produced.

1087
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

Then, it may be impossible to return a ladder program ii to a ladder

program i by an operation 2.
(Special use of wiring All address used in ladder program of specified line number of
change function) subsequent, is changed a new address independently of a command.
Only bit address can be changed.
Operate carefully with enough recognition of above.
’C@@@@@ Address 1 Address 2 NL’
(Symbol cannot be changed)
A new address
A previous address to be changed
Change start line number

Example) ’C7 R0.1 R1.2 <NL>’

— All ”R0.1” used in ladder program of 7th line or
subsequent, are changed to ”R1.2”.

4.3.4 Insert a new program to the generated sequence program.

Insert Set the EDIT screen (LADDER PROGRAM LIST screen) first.
a) Insert every instruction

Key in “I@@@@@ R X0.1 NL”.

Instruction to be inserted
Line number just before the instruction to be
inserted (maximum 5 digits)
I means insert.

b) Sequential insert
i) Key in ”IS@@@@@ <NL>” (Insert Succession) to set the
sequential insert mode, and *IS MODE* is displayed at the lower
right part of the screen.
@@@@@:Line number just before the instruction to be inserted
(maximum 5 digits)
ii) Instructions are sequentially inserted starting with the line next
to the line specified by @@@@@, each time the key–in
operation is done in the ”R X0.1 NL” format.
iii) After sequential insert, key in ”IE <NL>” (Insert End).
Example) Sequential insert of a sequence program
For inserting multiple instructions after step number
20
(Key in sequence)
1 IS20 <NL> (Sequential insert start
command)
³ *IS MODE* is displayed at the
lower right part of screen.

1088
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

00020 RD Y200.0 2 R.S R200.1 <NL>

00021 WRT R300.7 3 R.S R200.2 <NL>
4 R 5 <NL>
5 P 9 <NL>
6 IE <NL> (Sequential insert end
command)
³ *IS MODE* display disappears
from the lower right part of the
screen.

4.3.5 i) Delete every instruction

Delete Key in “D@@@@@ NL”.
Line number to be deleted
(maximum 5 digits)
D means delete.
ii) Sequential delete
Key in “D@@@@@,@@@@@ NL”.
Line number to complete delete
(maximum 5 digits)
Line number to start delete

4.3.6 Search a sequence number by a line number or instruction

Location Search i) Search by line number
Key in “L@@@@@ NL”.
Line number to be searched
(maximum 5 digits)
L means location search.
ii) Search by instruction (Search by address)
Key in “L@@@@@ R X0.1 NL”.
Instruction to be searched
Line number with which the search is to be started

CAUTION
Input data after changing the symbol display into address
display by passing R1 key, if the address of the instruction
to be searched is defined by a symbol and displayed by the
symbol.

1089
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

iii) Search by instruction (Search by symbol)

Key in “L@@@@@ R ACT NL”.
Instruction to be searched
(ACT: Symbol name)
Line number with which the search is to be started

CAUTION
This search applies to such a case as the address of the
instruction to be searched is defined by a symbol and the
symbol is displayed.

iv) Search by the bit address or its symbol name

The specified address (only bit address) or its symbol name is
searched from the specified line number independently of a
command.
Type in ’L@@@@ ????? NL’.
Bit address or its symbol name
Search start line number

Example) ’L1 R1.0 NL’

— Start searching bit address ”R1.0” from 1st line.
’L7 SMB NL’
— Start searching symbol name ”SM BL” defined at
bit address from 7th line.
v) Continuous search
A specified command, address (only bit address) or its symbol name
is searched from 2nd line displayed on the screen.
Type in ’L ????? NL’.
Command, bit address or its symbol name
to be searched
Type in ’F NL’.
FIND: Search the same command, bit address or its
symbol name as that searched just before,
from 2nd line displayed on the screen.

Example) ’L R R0.1 <NL>’

— Search the command ”RD R0.1” from 2nd line
displayed on the screen.
’L R0.1 <NL>’
— Search the bit address ”R0.1” from 2nd line displayed
on the screen.
’L SYMBOL <NL>’
— Search the symbol name ”SYMBOL” defined at bit
address from 2nd line displayed on the screen.

1090
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.3.7 The ladder diagram can be displayed on the programmer function EDIT
Display of Ladder screen.
Diagram Set the screen to EDIT screen (LADDER PROGRAM LIST)
a) Turn on F4 key.
b) Depress <NL> key
The ladder diagram is displayed on the screen.
For displaying the sequence program in the mnemonic format from
the ladder diagram, turn off F4 key, and depress <NL> key.
The ladder diagram at an optional point can be displayed by the step
number search or instruction search method.
If a ladder diagram cannot be displayed on one screen, it can be
displayed by scrolling it leftward, rightward, upward, and downward
as shown in the following table.
c) Edition during LADDER diagram display
Sequence programs can be edited even on the LADDER diagram
screen display, (This function is convenience when sequence
programs are edited with seeing LADDER diagram print out list.)
From ’EDIT=’ in the LADDER diagram screen display, sequence
programs can be edited by the same operation as in editing programs
in the ’LADDER PROGRAM LIST’ screen.

Scroll direction Key

Left (Left ladder on screen is ² NL

displayed.) 4 *** LADDER DIAGRAM ***

Right (Right ladder on screen is 6 NL

displayed.) X0.0 X0.1 Y 0.0
³
X1.0 X1.1 Y 0.1
Upper (Upper ladder on the ° NL
screen is displayed.) 8

Lower (Lower ladder on the 2 NL

screen is displayed.) ± TMR 1
X2.0 R 40.7
Upper half page X2.1
R2 NL
EDIT=
Lower half page
R2 NL

Fig. 4.3.7 Ladder diagram display screen

1091
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

Example)

* LADDER DIAGRAM *

1 From ’EDIT=’ IN the left figure, key in as follows.

’ISO NL’
END1 ’R X1.0 NL’
’W Y1.0 NL’
’IE NL’

Y0.0
X0.0 2 Press R0 key to display the ’LADDER PROGRAM
LIST’ screen.
Two lines ’RDX1.0’ AND ’WRT Y1.0’ are added before
’SUB1 (END1)’.
END2

~ ~
3 When the LADDER diagram is displayed again, the
diagram after adding the above two lines is displayed.
EDIT=

4.3.8 Editing command explanation screen can be displayed from Ladder

Help Screen program edition screen. (LADDER PROGRAM LIST or LADDER
DIAGRAM)
key in ’H <NL>’ to display the following screen.

*** HELP LIST ***

(@@@@@=SEQUENCE NO.)
<INSERT>
I@@@@@ OPERATION CODE : INSERT
IS@@@@@ : INSERT SUCCESSION START
IE : INSERT SUCCESSION END
<ALTER>
A@@@@@ OPERATION CODE : ALTER
AS@@@@@ : ALTER SUCCESSION START
AE : ALTER SUCCESSION END
<DELETE>
D@@@@(,@@@@@) : DELETE (SUCCESSION END)
<LOCATION SEACH>
L@@@@@ : SEQUENCE NO. SEARCH
L@@@@@ OPERATION CODE : OPERATION CODE SEARCH
L@@@@@ <ADDRESS OR SYMBOL> : ADDRESS OR SYMBOL SEARCH
L OPERATION CODE : SEARCH FROM DISPLAY 2ND LINE
L <ADDRESS OR SYMBOL> : SEARCH FROM DISPLAY 2ND LINE
F : FIND FROM DISPLAY 2ND LINE
<CHANGE ALL ADDRESS>
CA ADDRESS1 ADDRESS2 :CHANGE ALL ADDRESS1 TO ADDRESS2

Key in “<NL>” to return it to ladder program editing screen.

4.3.9 Key is “E <NL>” (End) after editing a sequence program, and the EDIT
Editing end screen is reset to the menu screen.

1092
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.4
INPUT OF PROGRAM

4.4.1 Read source programs (parameters, titles,

Source Program symbols, ladders, messages, and I/O modules) from an input unit
designated by an F key on the menu screen, and load them into SYSTEM
P series memory.
(1) Paper tape format of source programs
Paper tape format of source programs is of ISO code. No EIA code
paper tape can be used.
a) Parameter date

Feed % @0 CR −−−−− % CR Feed

b) Title date

Feed % @1 CR 1 MACHINE TOOL CR −−−−− % CR Feed

c) Symbol date

Feed % @2 CR F0.1 SYMBOL COMMENT CR −−−− % CR Feed

d) Ladder program

Feed % @3 CR RD X0.1 CR − − WRT WORK01 CR −− % CR Feed

e) Message date

Feed % @4 CR A0.0 MESSAGE = 1 CR −− A24.7 MESSAGE = 24 CR %

WRT WORK01 CR

CR ~ Feed

f) I/O module date

Feed % @5 CR X 0 0 0 5 ID32C CR −−−−− % CR Feed

1093
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

(2) Input method from PPR reader

1 Turn on F1 key.
2 Key in menu number “2 <NL>”.
3 The screen is switched, and the entry of a source program is
started.
4 After the source program has been normally entered, the screen
is automatically reset to the programmer menu screen. If an error
was detected during entry, “PART–” is displayed on the lower left
part of the screen. Check error contents, and key in “E NL”. The
screen is reset to the programmer menu screen.
(3) Entry method from floppy
1 Turn on F2 key.
2 Key in menu number “2 <NL>”.
3 The following message is displayed at the lower part of the screen.
SET FD & KEY IN “OK” “KILL” OR “NO”
FD0=OK <DRIVE> <@NAME OR : NUMBER>
FD0=
Fig. 4.4.1 shows the menu screen in the floppy entry mode.
[Screen when source programs are input form floppy]

SET I/O KEY & KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT.

NO.ITEMS
01 EDIT LADDER PROGRAM.
02 INPUT LADDER PROGRAM FROM PTR OR FD.
03 INPUT ROM DATA FROM FD. PMC–RAM OR ROM.
04 OUTPUT LADDER PROGRAM TO PTP. FD OR PRINTER.
05 OUTPUT ROM DATA TO FD. PMC–RAM OR ROM.
06 COMPARE LADDER PROGRAM WITH PTR OR FD.
07 COMPARE ROM DATA WITH FD. PMC–RAM OR ROM.
08 (UNUSED)
09 CLEAR OF TITLE. SYMBOL. LADDER OR MESSAGE DATA.
10 PARAMETER SET.
00 END EDIT & DISPLAY.
F1 : PTR (I) . F4 : GRP (O) SYMBOL =00.0KB SCAN TIME–OO8MS
F2 : FD (I) . F10 : EPRT (O) LADDER =00.0KB
F5 : PRT (O) MESSAGE=00.0KB
F6 : PTP (O)
F7 : FD (O) END SEQ.NO=00000
F8 : PMC (I/O) ERR SEQ.NO=00000
F9 : ROM (I/O) ERR BLOCK =00000
SET FD & KEY IN ’OK’ ’KILL’ OR ’NO’
FD0 = OK ’@FILE NAME’
<DRIVE><@NAME OR NUMBER>
NO.=
Example

Key in file names to be input from floppy as shown in the example.

Fig. 4.4.1 Floppy input menu screen

4 Insert the floppy into the disk, and enter the following data.
Characters in < > need not be keyed in.
OK @LADDER1 NL
File name (provisional file name)
5 The screen is switched, and the entry of source programs is started
from the floppy.

1094
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

6 The following procedure is the same as in 4.4.1 2) 4.

7 A file name is inputtable up to maximum 17 characters. All
characters on the SYSTEM P series keyboard are employable for
this entry. The kinds of capitals are not limited.
“@” (at mark) shows a file name input identifier. Key in it just
before the file name as shown in example $$ without fail.

CAUTION
If sequence program instructions are sequentially entered
while a sequence program is loaded in the SYSTEM P
series memory, the instructions are entered into the
SYSTEM P series memory following the previously loaded
program. Clear SYSTEM P series memory, if a new program
is entered from the floppy. (see 4.7)
The SYSTEM P series memory is cleared by turning off the
SYSTEM P series power supply.

4.4.2 (1) Transfer of sequence program from the PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC

ROM Format Program The created sequence program is transferred from the
PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC.
First, connect the SYSTEM P Series and the CNC with a
Reader/Puncher interface cable. For the method and location of
connection, refer to the section ”3.2 Configuration devices and their
connection”. In the following procedure, operations 1 to 6 are NC
side operations.
The keys enclosed in [ ] are soft keys.
1 Pressing soft keys [SYSTEM] and [PMC] displays the PMC
screen. Steps 2 to 4 below must be performed when [I/O] is not
displayed on the PMC screen. For a 9–inch CRT, press soft key
[NEXT] to check that [I/O] is not on the screen.
2 Pressing soft keys [PMCPRM] and [KEEPRL] on the PMC
screen displays the keep relay setting screen.
3 Set K17.1 to 1 on the keep relay setting screen.
4 Pressing soft key [RETURN] displays the PMC screen.
5 On the PMC screen, pressing soft key [I/O] displays the I/O
screen. For a 9–inch CRT, press soft key [NEXT] before pressing
soft key [I/O].
6 Pressing soft key [EXEC] on the I/O screen puts the system in the
EXECUTING state.
7 Turn on the F8 key on the SYSTEM P series menu screen. (Turn
on the F12 key at the same time when the C–language program
is included.)
8 If the menu number ‘3 [NL]’ is keyed in, the message shown
below will be displayed. PMC–SA1/SA2/SB is not displayed.
Key in the type of ROM module to be used from now on. (Refer
to Note 1 when selecting ROM module B, C or D.)

1095
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

SELECT THE TYPE OF ROM MODULE ACCORDING

TO THE FOLLOWING NO.
ROM MODULE 0:A 1:B, 2:C, 3:D
NO.=
By means of the above–described operations, the program
transfer is started. The transfer screen is displayed on the
SYSTEM P Series screen and the transfer counter counts. The
screen returns to the menu screen after the end of transfer.
(2) Input from a floppy disk
1 Turn on the F2 key. (Turn on the F12 key at the same time when
the C language program is included.)
2 If the menu number ‘3 [NL]’ is keyed in, the message shown
below will be displayed. PMC–SA1/SA2/SB is not displayed.
Key in the type of ROM module to be used from now on. (Refer
to Note 1 when selecting ROM module B, C or D.)
SELECT THE TYPE OF ROM MODULE ACCORDING
TO THE FOLLOWING NO.
ROM MODULE 0:A 1:B, 2:C, 3:D
NO.=
3 The following message is displayed at the lower left part of the
screen.
SET FD & KEY IN ‘OK’,‘KILL’ OR ‘NO’
FD=OK <@FILE NAME>
FD0=OK <DRIVE><@NAME OR : NUMBER>
FD0=
4 Insert the floppy into the disk and enter the following data
5 ’OK @LADDER2 [NL]
File name
6 The screen is switched and the ROM format program is started
from the floppy disk.
7 After reading is ended, the screen is automatically changed to the
program menu screen if no problem occurs. When an error is
detected during reading, ’PART’ = is displayed on the left lower
part of the screen. Check the error and key in ’E [NL]’ to return
the screen to the program menu screen.
(3) Method of inputting from the FA writer and PMC writer
1 Check the setting of the ROM writer. (See Section 3.4, ”Setting
of I/O Device.”)
2 Put the FA Writer in the REMOTE mode by the
[REMOTE/LOCAL] key before using it.
3 Turn on the F9 key. (Turn on the F12 key at the same time when
the C language program is included.)
4 If the menu number ‘3 <NL>’ is keyed in, the message shown
below will be displayed. PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC is not
displayed. Key in the type of ROM module to be used from now
on. (Refer to Note 1 when selecting ROM module B, C or D.)
SELECT THE TYPE OF ROM MODULE ACCORDING
TO THE FOLLOWING NO.
ROM MODULE 0:A 1:B, 2:C, 3:D
NO.=

1096
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

5 The screen is switched and the message shown below is

displayed.
SET EPROM OR ROM MODULE & KEY IN ‘OK’ OR
‘NO’
KEY IN=
6 Check the above message. For the PMC–SA1/SA2/SB, insert the
EPROM for the PMC into the FA Writer or PMC Writer. For the
PMC–RC, insert the ROM module for the PMC into the FA
Writer or PMC Writer. Note, however, that ROM modules are not
available with the PMC Writer.
7 Key in ’OK <NL>’ or ’NO <NL>’.
When ’OK <NL>’ is keyed in, the sequence program written into
the EPROM and ROM module for PMC is entered into P–G
memory.
The screen returns to the menu screen if it ends with no problems
occurring.
When ’NO <NL>’ is keyed in, the screen returns to the menu
screen.

CAUTION
When using the SYSTEM P Mate, if ROM module B, C or
D is selected, overlay occurs. When cassette B or C is
selected, set the work floppy disk for external memory in
drive 1.

1097
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.5
OUTPUT OF
PROGRAM

4.5.1 By selecting ’04 <NL>’ (OUTPUT LADDER PROGRAM) from menu

no.4, the following detail menu is displayed.
Source Program

SET I/O KEY & KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT.

NO. ITEMS
01 OUTPUT ALL DATA.
02 OUTPUT SYSTEM PARAMETER.
03 OUTPUT TITLE DATA
04 OUTPUT SYMBOL DATA.
05 OUTPUT MESSAGE DATA.
06 OUTPUT I/O MODUL DATA.
07 OUTPUT LADDER PROGRAM (MNEMONIC).
08 OUTPUT LADDER DIAGRAM (ONLY FANUC PRINTER).
09 OUTPUT CROSS REFERENCE (SEQUENCE NO.)
00 END
F5 : PRT (O) , F10 : FANUC PRINTER (O)
F6 : PTP (O) , F13 : CROSS REFERENCE (NO.8)
F7 : FD (O)

NO. =

Select a desired data and device from the above details menu screen by
combining the menu numbers and F keys.
(1) OUTPUT ALL DATA
All data of system parameters, titles, symbols, messages, I/O
modules and ladder programs (source format) are output to a device
specified by an F key.
Turn on an F key corresponding to the device to be output, and key
in detail menu number ’01 <NL>’.
If F10 key is turned on, all data are output to the FANUC printer
(external printer) and the ladder diagram is output last. If F13 key is
turned on furthermore, the ladder diagram is output with a cross
reference.
(2) OUTPUT SYSTEM PARAMETER
System parameter data are output to a device specified by an F key.
Turn on an F key corresponding to the device to be output, and key
in detail menu number ’02 <NL>’.
(3) OUTPUT TITLE, DATA
Title data are output to device specified by an F key.
Turn on an F key corresponding to a device to be output, and key in
detail menu No. ’03 <NL>’.
(4) OUTPUT SYMBOL DATA
Symbol data are output to device specified by an F key.
Turn on an F key corresponding to a device to be output and key in
detail menu number ’04 <NL>’.
The screen is switched and the following display appears.
OUTPUT = ’L@@@@ (,@@@@)’
OUTPUT =_
Specify the output range by line numbers as follows.

1098
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

Example)
Key in ’L1, 100 NL’
Output end liner number (If this parameter is
omitted, data are output to the last one.)
Output start line number
(5) OUTPUT MESSAGE DATA
Message data are output to a device specified by an F key.
Turn on an F key corresponding to a device to be output, and key in
detail menu number ’05 <NL>’.
The screen is switched and the following display appears.
OUTPUT = ’A@@.@ (,@@.@)’
OUTPUT =_
Specify the output range by addresses as follows.
Example)
Key in ’A1.0,10.1’
Output end address (If this parameter is
omitted, data are output to the last one.)
Output start address
(6) OUTPUT I/O MODULE DATA
I/O module data are output to a device specified by an F key.
Turn on an F key corresponding to a device to be output, and key in
detail menu number ’06 <NL>’.
(7) OUTPUT LADDER PROGRAM (MNEMONIC)
Ladder program (source format) data are output to a device specified
by an F key.
Turn on an F key corresponding to a device to be output, and key in
detail menu number ’07 <NL>’.
The screen is switched and the following display appears.
OUTPUT = ’L@@@@ (,@@@@)’
OUTPUT =_
Specify the output range by line numbers as follows.
Example)
Key in ’L1,100 NL’
Output end line number (If this parameter is
omitted, data are output to the last one.)
Output start line number
(8) OUTPUT LADDER DIAGRAM (ONLY FANUC PRINTER)
A ladder diagram is output to the FANUC printer (external printer).
Key in detail menu number ’08 <NL>’, and then, turn on F10 key.
Turn on F13 key furthermore, if it is desired to output the ladder
diagram with a cross reference.
The screen is switched and the following display appears.
OUTPUT = ’L@@@@ (,@@@@)’
OUTPUT =_
Specify the output range by line numbers as follows.
(Partial output is also possible.)

1099
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

Example)
Key in ’L1,100 <NL>’
Output end line number (If this parameter is
omitted, data are output to the last one.)
Output start line number

ITEMS

* ALL ADDRESS ’ALL’

* HEAD CHARACTER ’G’
* ADDRESS ’G14.6’
* ADDRESS TO ADDRESS ’G14.6,R142.5’
* ADDRESS TO END ’G14.6–END’

* END ; PUSH ’NL’ KEY

ADDR=

CAUTION
D It takes time more or less from the end of operation on end
to the start of printer operation when outputting the
LADDER diagram with cross reference. (EXECUTING is
displayed on the screen.)
This time depends upon the size and complexity of
sequence programs. The cross reference is displayed by
the page number and the line number of the LADDER
diagram every contact.
See Appendix printout example.
D If R1 key is pressed when each data is being output to the
FANUC printer (External printer), the output is cancelled.

(9) OUTPUT CROSS REFERENCE (SEQUENCE NO)

Addresses (symbols, comments) are printed with cross reference
Nos. by FANUC external PRINTER.
These Nos. correspond to the Mnemonic format list (screen) or
Ladder diagram (RD command line number).
Key in above detailed memo No. ’09 <NL>’ and turn F10 key on. The
screen changes to display the key in example and ’ADDR=’ as below.
Key in addresses to be output according to examples.
Key in example Address to be output
ALL ALL <NL> All addresses (G,F,Y,X,A,R,T,K,C,D
in order)
Address initial R <NL> All address with the specified initial
Bit address X1.0<NL> Only bit address specified address
Byte address R58 <NL> Bit 0 – 7 of specified
Address range specification F8.0, X7.2<NL> Specified addresses in order of
G,F,Y,X,A,R,T,K, C,D
X0.2–END<NL> All address after specified address

1100
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

*** CROSS REFERENCE LIST ***

PAGE=1
ADDRESS SYMBOL COMMENT DATA

G0000.0 *IT
653
G0000.1 *CST
653
G0000.4 *ESP
22 568 901 912 1177 1189 1288 2800
G0000.5 *SP
45 2802
G0000.7 ERS
3435 3512
G0001.0 *AIT
656

NOTE
1 When the same address performs double writing,”*
MULTIPLE COIL USED *” is displayed.
2 If the F10 key is set to OFF and output performed, the cross
reference table is displayed on the screen.

4.5.2 A 12–inch chart is also applicable to the FANUC printer (external

printer).
Paper Command
(The standard chart size is 11 inches.) Enter the command for changing
the chart by the following operation.
(1) Press [R3] key from the R key menu screen.
(2) ’REQUEST=’ is displayed at the lower left part of the screen.
(3) Key in ’PAPER <NL>’.
(4) The following message is displayed at the lower left part of the screen.
KEY IN NUMBER OF PAPER LENGTH
EXAMPLE 11–INCH;0,12–INCH;1.
LINE NUM.=
(5) Key in ’0 <NL>’ for 11–inch chart, or ’1 <NL>’ for 12–inch chart.

1101
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.5.3 (1) Transfer of sequence program into PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC

ROM Format Program A generated sequence program is transferred into
PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC.
Connect SYSTEM P series to CNC by using a Reader/Puncher
interface cable for the connection method and places, see Section 3.2.
Steps 1 to 6 show the operation on the CNC side.
1 Pressing soft keys <SYSTEM> and [PMC] displays the PMC
screen. Steps 2 to 4 below must be performed when [I/O] is not
displayed on the PMC screen. For a 9–inch CRT, press soft key
[NEXT] to check that [I/O] is not on the screen.
2 Pressing soft keys [PMCPRM] and [KEEPRL] on the PMC
screen displays the keep relay setting screen.
3 Set K17.1 to 1 on the keep relay setting screen.
4 Pressing soft key [RETURN] displays the PMC screen.
5 On the PMC screen, pressing soft key [I/O] displays the I/O
screen. For a 9–inch CRT, press soft key [NEXT] before pressing
soft key [I/O].
6 Pressing soft key [EXEC] on the I/O screen puts the system in the
EXECUTING state.
7 Turn on F8 key from the SYSTEM P series menu screen. (Also
turn on F12 key when the C language program is included.)
8 Key in menu number “5 <NL>”.
Now, the program transfer is started.
In SYSTEM P series, the transfer screen is displayed and the
transfer counter is counted up. After transfer, the screen is reset
to menu screen. In CNC screen, the COUNTER display is
counted up.
*Procedure when a i) When an alarm 31 occurs on SYSTEM P series screen;
program cannot be Cause 1 : Reader/Puncher interface cable is defective.
transferred from Remedy : Use the specified cable.
SYSTEM P series to RAM Cause 2 : Reader/Puncher interface connector is not
connected to correct channel SYSTEM P series.
of PMC Remedy : Connect the connector correctly.
ii) When the transfer counter of SYSTEM P series screen is
counted up and normally terminated, but data are not
transferred to the PMC RAM correctly;
Cause 1 : Reader/Puncher interface connector is not
connected to CNC.
Remedy : Connect it correctly.
Cause 2 : CNC screen is not set to ”I/O of PMC” screen.
Remedy : Set the I/O screen by the soft key.
Cause 3 : An error occurs in ACI channel due to a certain
cause.
Remedy : Turn off the power supply once, and turn it on
again.

1102
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

(2) Output method to floppy

1 Turn on F7 key. (Also turn on F12 key when the C language
program is included.)
2 Set the floppy to the disk.
3 Key in menu number “5 <NL>”.
4 The screen is switched and the following message is displayed:
SET FD & KEY IN “OK”,“KILL” OR “NO”.
FD0= OK <INT OR ADD><P OR NP,></DATE,>
<DRIVE>@NAME
FD0 =
When loading data starting with the start of the floppy, specify
INT. When loading data after the loaded files, specify ADD. After
outputting all data, the screen is reset to the program menu screen.
The menu screen is also reset by keying in “NO <NL>”.
(3) Method of outputting data to FA writer or PMC writer (EPROM for
PMC/ROM module write)
1 Check the setting of the ROM writer. (See Section 3.4, “Setting
of I/O Device.”)
2 Put the FA writer in the REMOTE mode by the
[REMOTE/LOCAL] key before using it.
3 Turn on F9 key. (Turn on F12 key when the C language program
is included.)
4 Key in menu number “5 NL”.
5 The screen is switched to the title screen, and the following
message is displayed.
SET EPROM OR ROM MODULE & KEY IN ”OK” OR
“NO”.
KEY IN =
Check the above message. For the PMC–SA1/SA2/SB, insert the
EPROM for the PMC into the FA Writer or PMC Writer. For the
PMC–RC, insert the ROM module for the PMC into the FA
Writer or PMC Writer. Note, however, that ROM modules are not
available with the PMC Writer.
6 Key in “OK <NL>” or “NO <NL>”.
When “OK <NL>” is keyed in, data are output from the SYSTEM
P series memory to the EPROM for PMC or ROM module.
After normal end, the screen is reset to the menu screen.

1103
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

*** TRANSFER ROM DATA TO PMC WRITER ***

01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME

02 MACHINE TOOL NAME
03 PMC & NC NAME
04 PMC PROGRAM NO
05 EDITION NO
06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO
07 DATE OF PROGRAMING
08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
09 ROM WRITTEN BY
10 REMARKS

PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : 4061 EDITION :01

MEMORY USED : 00.0 KBYT SCAN TIME : 008 MSEC

SET EPROM OR ROM MODULE & KEY IN ’OK’ OR ’NO’

KEY IN =

*** TRANSFER ROM DATA TO PMC WRITER ***

01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME

02 MACHINE TOOL NAME
03 PMC & NC NAME
04 PMC PROGRAM NO
05 EDITION NO
06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO
07 DATE OF PROGRAMING
08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
09 ROM WRITTEN BY
10 REMARKS

PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : 4061 EDITION :01

MEMORY USED : 00.0 KBYT SCAN TIME : 008 MSEC
Display mode
BLANK : Blank check
MODE=BLANK PROGRAM : Write
ROML=10 ROMH=EF MEM FF AD=000000 VERIFY : Compare
ALARM=083

OUTPUT= Error number

Enter ’E NL’, and restart from menu.

1104
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.6
COLLATION OF
PROGRAM

4.6.1 Enter source programs from the designated input unit, and compare them.
The operation method is the same as source program entry, except that ”6”
Collation of Source
shall be designated as the menu number.
Programs
(1) Comparison with PTR
1 Turn on F1 key.
2 Key in menu number “6 NL”.
(2) Comparison with FD
1 Turn on F2 key.
2 Key in menu number “6 <NL>”.
3 The screen is switched, and the following message is displayed.
SET FD & KEY IN “OK”, “KILL” OR “NO”,
FD0=OK<DRIVE> <@NAME OR : NUMBER>
FD0=
Specify the file name to be compared.
After normal end, the screen is automatically reset to the menu screen.
Also, this menu screen is reset by keying in “KILL

4.6.2 Compare ROM format program by reading it from the specified input
device. The operation method is the same as in ROM format program
ROM Format Program
input, except that menu number “7” is specified.
(1) Comparison with FD
1 Turn on F2 key.
2 Key in menu number “7 <NL>”.
3 The following operation is the same as in 4.6.1 2)– 3 and later.
(2) Comparison with PMC–RAM
Display the I/O of PMC screen on the CRT/MDI before executing the
following operation.
1 Turn on F8 key.
2 Key in menu number “7 <NL>”.
Note when comparing P–G and PMC–RAM : The comparison
between P–G and PMC–RAM should be performed immediately
after the data transfer. (When the comparison is made after the output
of ROM format data, the parity portion of data may become error.)
(3) Comparison with EPROM for PMC and ROM module
1 Turn on F9 key.
2 Key in menu number “7 <NL>”.
The screen is switched, and the comparison of ROM program is
started. After normal end, the screen is automatically reset to the
menu screen.

1105
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.7 Delete ladder programs, symbols, message, titles, and I/O module data
being loaded into SYSTEM P series memory according to the following
DELETION OF procedure.
PROGRAMS
1 Put the screen to menu screen.
2 Key in menu No. “9 <NL>”.
3 The screen is switched, and the following message is displayed at the
lower left part of the screen. See Fig. 4.7.
KEY IN “1,2,3,4 OR 5” OR “NO”
CLEAR/KEEP =
4 Key in data number of the data to be deleted or key in “NO <NL>”,
if it is not desired to delete any data. After processing, the screen is
automatically reset to the programmer menu screen.

KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT TO CLEAR DATA

NO. ITEMS
01 TITLE DATA
02 SYMBOL DATA
03 LADDER DATA
04 MESSAGE DATA
05 I/O MODULE DATA
06 ALL DATA CLEAR

KEY IN ’1. 2. 3. 4. 5 OR 6 OR ’NO’

CLEAR/KEEP =

Fig. 4.7 Delection of sepuence programs

Example)
i) When all title data are to be deleted;
Key in “1 <NL>”.
ii) When all symbol data are to be deleted;
Key in “2 <NL>”.
iii) When all ladder programs are to be deleted;
Key in “3 <NL>”.
iv) When all message data are to be deleted;
Key in “4 <NL>”.
v) When I/O module data are to be deleted;
Key in “5 <NL>”.
vi) When all titles, symbols, ladders, messages and I/O module data
are to be deleted;
Key in “6 <NL>”.
vii) When no data are to be deleted;
Key in “NO <NL>”.

1106
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.8 Key in <NL> alone at the menu screen to display the R key menu screen.
Key in R3 at the R screen, and the display ’REQUEST=’ will appear at
SPECIAL USES OF bottom left of the screen, making key inputs possible. Key in <NL> on
THE R3 KEY this screen to return to the R key menu screen.
R3 executes a large number of processings. For the FANUC LADDER
system, however, note the following two points:
(1) Floppy file name output
1 Press R3 key at the R key menu screen.
2 This will change the screen contents, displaying ’REQUEST=’ at
its left bottom.
3 Key in FDLIST <NL>.
4 The file name will appear on the CRT display. To print out the file
name, turn on the F5 (printer) key in advance.
(2) Change of I/O devices (for output to a printer other than that of PPR)
1 Key in IO PRT, CN3, F5 <NL> while the screen displays
’REQUEST=’. When the F5 key has been turned on in advance,
the data is printed on the printer connected to connector CN3 on
the SYSTEM P series rear side.

1107
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.9
DIRECT EDITING BY
LADDER DIAGRAM

4.9.1 Using the P–G Mate/Mark II software keys (in the case of P–G Mate, the
Outline F keys), sequence program creation and editing can be performed directly
by the ladder diagram.
In the following explanation, [P–G Mate] is called [Mate] and [P–G Mark
II] is called [Mark II].
When it is possible to use this function, in the R key menu screen
R1: EDIT
is displayed. (In systems where [UNUSED] is displayed, it cannot be
used.)
The following items are present in the edit function.
D Ladder diagram direct editing by software key and cursor (input,
addition, deletion and substitution)
D Copying, moving and deletion of multiple lines of the ladder
D Optional relay and coil reference
D Comment display on ladder diagram

4.9.2 (1) This function operates only when the P–G Mate main unit is version
04 and later. (When the power supply is turned on, it is displayed in
Limitations in SYSTEM the lower right part of the initial screen.)
P Mate (2) The function keys <F keys> are used instead of the soft keys (P–G
Mark II). In the description that follows, an explanation for the soft
keys (P–G Mark II) is given. When P–G Mate is used, operate with
the function keys. At this time, in order to make the F key respond
and display the screen bottom line, the F key lamp illuminates to
correspond to those items displayed with shaded characters on the
screen.

4.9.3 The program menu appears in order to operate this function.

Selection of Program The program menu is displayed when the <R1> key is pressed from the
Menu by Soft Keys R menu screen. The program menu is displayed above the soft keys (in
the case of P–G Mate, the function keys) as shown in the screen below,
and gives significance to the keys.
(1) Keyboard
Refer to Section “3.3 SYSTEM P keyboard”.
(2) Relationship betweeen program menus and soft keys
The relationship between the program menus and the soft keys is
shown in the following for each function. These menus are changed
by pressing the related keys. For menu contents, refer to the
explanations described later. Utilize this figure when operating.

1108
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

R0 : PROGRAMMER
R1 : EDIT
R2 : UNUSED
R3 : REQUEST
Press the <R1> key

R keys menu screen

FUNCTN or or COMAND

[ COMAND ]

[ COMAND ]

INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE

1 2 3 4 5

1 [ DELNET ]

EXEC CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

2 [ INSERT ]

INSNET INSLIN INSELM

3 [ ADRESS ]

INSNET DELNET INSERT SYMBOL SEARCH COPY MOVE

4 [ SEARCH ]

TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH F–SRCH C–DOWN C–UP

5 [ COPY/MOVE ]

UNTIL CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

TO CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

1109
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.9.4 In order to input the sequence program, press the <R1> key from the R
Sequence Program key menu. The soft key menu program is displayed, and in the case that
the sequence program has not yet been input, only the left and right
Input vertical lines of the ladder diagram are displayed on the screen.
Start inputting a program with the screen in this state.
Input a ladder diagram program by moving the cursor to the desired input
position using the cursor key.
The following description shows an example of the input of a program of
basic instruction and a program of functional instruction.
(1) Basic instruction program input

R0.1 R10.2 R1.7 R20.2

X2.4

1 Press the soft key [ ] after moving the cursor to the start
position.
Symbol [ ] is input at the cursor position and
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL is displayed at the lower right
part of the screen. This is a cautionary message which shows that
the ladder diagram horizontal line is not yet completely created.
Input the continuation address and bit data.
2 Press the <NL> key after inputting R0.1 using the keyboard. The
address is set on the contact and the cursor shifts rightward.
3 Input A contact with address R10.2 by the above methods 1 and
2.
4 Input B contact R1.7.
Press the soft key [ ], input address R1.7, and then press the
<NL> key. The address is set on the B contact and the cursor shifts
rightward.
5 Press software key [ ] with the cursor position unchanged.
A right horizontal line is automatically drawn, and a relay coil
symbol is entered near the right vertical line.
6 Press the <NL> key after inputting address R20.2.
The cursor automatically shifts to the input start position of the
next line.
7 Next, input the OR condition.
Press the soft key [ ], input address X2.4, and then press
the <NL> key. The address is set on the B contact and the cursor
shifts rightward.

1110
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

8 Press the soft key [ ] to input a horizontal line

When inputting the horizontal bar key [ ], by keying in a
numerical value and pressing this bar key, a horizontal line for the
frequency will be drawn. However, this horizontal line will not
be drawn over the LINE.
9 Because the upper right line OR is necessary, press the soft key
[ ] and input the upper right vertical line to end.

NOTE
1 When the ladder program displayed on the screen is incomplete (when, for example, addresses
have not been entered) or erroneous, the screen cannot be scrolled even when a page key is
pressed. Before attempting to scroll the screen, therefore, ensure that the ladder program is
complete and error–free.
2 Since 8 contacts + coil are specified to be inputtable per line from the screen, any more contacts
in excess of this amount cannot be input. However, this restriction does not apply to a sequence
program created with mnemonic format.
When a sequence program, transferred from the offline programmer to the PMC, exceeds the
length which can be displayed on a single line, the program is displayed using two or more lines,
linked with a continuation symbol.
This continuation symbol is not erasable by software key [−−−−].
3 Below is shown an example with an error net, or part of it, erased with no error display.

1 Case of multiple nets on 1 LINE

Net is repeated

Downward from the net is erased

2 Case of multiple WRT results in 1 NET difference as shown in the diagram below.

Section C is erased

1111
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

NOTE
3 Case of exceeding the highest rank WRT in 1 NET
B

A C

Section B is erased

(2) Case of functional instruction program input

To input a functional instruction, input the soft key [FUNCTN], and
then input the functional instruction name or SUB number.
Further, when inputting a functional instruction, after keying in the
functional instruction number, it does not matter if the [FUNCTN]
key is pressed.
When you can not remember the instruction name or SUB number,
the functional instruction table corresponding to the instruction
symbol and SUB number can be displayed on the screen.
The functional instruction table is automatically displayed after
inputting an incorrect instruction name or SUB number and then
pressing the [FUNCTN] key, or by pressing the [FUNCTN] key only
without inputting any other key.
In order to return from the functional instruction table to the original
ladder diagram, press the [FUNCTN] key.

ACT MOVE (1) (2) (3) (4)

(SUB 8)

Control condition Output address

Input address
Low rank 4 bit logic data

High rank 4 bit logic data

When inputting a functional instruction with this function, the functional

instruction parameters are input vertically as shown in the diagram below.

MOVE
(1)
(SUB 8) (2)

(3)
(4)

1112
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

1 Input a control condition.

Press soft key [ ], input the address and bit data, and then
press the <NL> key. The cursor shifts rightward.
2 Input an instruction
Press the soft key [FUNCTN], input SUB number 8, and then
press the <NL> key. A functional instruction diagram appears as
shown in the above figure.
3 Input an instruction parameter
Input the high rank 4 bit logic data of the first parameter, and then
press the <NL> key. The cursor automatically lowers
downwards. Input the three residual parameters in order.

4.9.5 The method of substituting a created sequence program is the same as that
described earlier in Section 4.9.4.
Substitution of
Sequence Programs Move the cursor to the program part you want to alter and input the change
data.

4.9.6 From the soft key program menu, press the soft key [COMAND] and
operate with the soft keys shown below.
Additions to Sequence
Programs When you want to end the program menu shown below, press the soft key
at the extreme left.

INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE

INSNET INSLIN INSELM

A sequence program is added in four ways on the ladder diagram as

described below.
(1) Case of adding a relay contact in the horizontal direction

When the addition is horizontal

Case of adding

Move the cursor to the position where you want to add, and input te
program by the method described in Section 4.9.4.

1113
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

When a vertical line influences the addition

ÕÕÕ
Case of adding

ÕÕÕ
Cursor

1 Move the cursor to the above position.

2 Press the soft key [ ] in order to erase the upper left vertical line.
The upper left line, vertical to the cursor disappears.
3 Press the soft key [ ] in order to produce an upper right line
vertical to the cursor. Then, press the soft key [ ]. Both
vertical and horizontal lines are created.
4 Shift the cursor to a line of contact addition position.
5 Press the soft key [ ] to add contacts.
(2) Adding a vertical line
For adding a vertical line as shown in the above diagram, the area to
be added is required. In order to produce this area, shift the entire part
after the part to be added by one line by moving the cursor to the
ladder diagram within the dotted line range (an optional part is
allowable) and then pressing the soft key [INSNET].
The lower ladder diagram shifts downward by one line, each time the
[INSNET] key is pressed thereby producing the area to which a line
is to be added.
If a surplus addition area remains unused after the addition processing
ends (for example, if an area corresponding to 3 lines has been
reserved when two lines have been added), there is no problem if the
area is left remaining.

Addition

1 Move the cursor to the ladder diagram bounded by a dotted line.

2 Press the soft key [INSNET].
3 Pressing the [INSNET] key without keying in numeric values will
cause one line to be inserted.

1114
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4 Pressing the [INSNET] key with keying in numeric values will

cause the line to be inserted the number of times specified by the
numeric value input.
5 After setting the cursor to a position to which you want to add,
press the soft key [ ]. After setting address data, press the
<NL> key. The cursor shifts rightward.
6 Press the shift key [ ] to create an OR circuit.
(3) Inserting the 1 NET sequence program LINE.
Space lines are inserted in units of 1 LINE.
1 Key in the number of lines you want to insert and press the
[INSLIN] key. The inputted number of lines will be inserted. (If
the number of lines to be inserted is not keyed in, but the
[INSLIN] key is pressed, one line will be inserted.)

a
ÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕ
Crusor

ÕÕÕ
b
ÕÕÕ
If the [INSLIN] key is pressed with the cursor in the above
position, the state shown in the diagram on the right will occur.
(4) Inserting the 1 NET sequence program elements
Elements are inserted in 1 element units.
1 Key in the number of elements you want to insert and press the
[INSELM] key. The inputted number of elements will be
inserted. If a number of elements prefixed by the character ”A”
are keyed in and the [INSELM] key is pressed, the elements are
inserted after the cursor.
(If the number of elements to be inserted is not keyed in, but the
[INSELM] key is pressed, one element is inserted.)

ÕÕÕ
a
ÕÕÕ
Cursor

b
ÕÕÕ
ÕÕÕ
1115
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

If the [INSELM] key is pressed with the cursor in the position on

the left, the state shown in the diagram on the right will occur.

ÕÕÕ
a
ÕÕÕ
Cursor

ÕÕÕ
b
ÕÕÕ
If the character ”A” is keyed in and the [INSELM] key is pressed
with the cursor in the position on the left, the state shown in the
diagram on the right will occur.

4.9.7 (1) For deleting part of a program, use the following three kinds of soft
keys and delete after setting the cursor to the unnecessary part.
Deleting a Sequence
[– – – –] : Deletion of horizontal lines, relay contacts coils, etc.
Program
[ ] : Deletion of upper left vertical line to the cursor
[ ] : Deletion of upper right vertical line to the cursor
(2) For the deletion of a program net (part corresponding to the section
from RD instruction to WRT instruction), use the [DELNET] key.
(3) Deleting multiple NETs in NET units

INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE

EXEC CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

1 Deletion
Move the cursor to the NET you want to delete and press the
[DELETE] key. The net you want to delete will be displayed in
red. (In the case of Mate, in reversal display.)
2 Deleting multiple nets
Move the cursor with the cursor DOWN key, [C–DOWN] key, or
[SEARCH] key to display in red the NET you want to delete. (In
the case of Mate, in reversal display.) Further, key in a numerical
value and press the [C–DOWN] key to move the cursor the
number of times specified by this value.
3 Execution . . . . . . Press the [EXEC] key
Cancellation . . . . Press the [CANCEL] key
4 If you already know the NET you want to delete, move the cursor
to the first NET, key in the number of NETs, and press the
[DELNET] key to omit steps 1 and 2.

1116
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.9.8 Search a sequence program by using the following soft keys.

Searching a Sequence (1) Soft key [TOP]
Program When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program is
desplayed on the screen and the cursor also sifts to the program start
position.
(2) Soft key [BOTTOM]
When this key is pressed, the last of the sequence program is
displayed on the screen and the cursor also shifts to this program end
position.
(3) Soft key [SRCH]
In this search, you specify an address you want to search and it
searches the specified address from the program of the cursor part on
this screen to the last part of the program and displays the address on
the screen. There are two methods to specify the address you want
to search.
(a) Method of specifying the address by the cursor
Set the cursor to the relay contact part of the address you want to
search and press the soft key [SRCH].
The system searches the same address as the address specified by
the cursor from the cursor part of the program currently displayed
on the screen to the end of the program.
When the same address is found, the program part is displayed
on the screen, and the cursor shifts to that address part. If the same
address is not found as a result of this search, the cursor remains
in the same position.
When finishing, press the soft key on the extreme left.
(b) Method of specifying the address by input
Input the address you want to searcch by using address and
numeric keys, then press the soft key [SRCH].
The same address as specified is searched from the program of the
cursor part currently displayed on the screen to the last part of the
program.
When the same address is found, the program part is displayed
on the screen, and the cursor shifts to that address part.
If the same address is not found as a result of this search, an error
is displayed.
(4) Soft key [W–SRCH]
This key specifies an address of the relay coil to be searched, and then
searches the relay coil of the specified address from the program at
the cursor part to the end of the program on this screen. Then, it
displays the relay coil on the screen.
Two methods are available to specify the address of the relay coil to
be searched.
(a) Method of specifying the address by cursor
Set the cursor to the relay contact of the relay coil to be searched,
and press the soft key [W–SRCH].
The corresponding relay coil is searched from the program of the
cursor part to the end of the program.
When the relay coil is found, the program part is displayed on the
screen, and the cursor shifts to the relay coil.

1117
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

If no corresponding relay coil is found as a result of the search,

an error occurs.

INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE

TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH F–SRCH C–DOWN C–UP

ÕÕÕ Y1.2

ÕÕÕ
X2.0 R20.1 R6.4

R0.5
When you want to search the same
R5.0 X4.2 R20.2 address as specified here. Set the
cursor to this position and press the soft
key [SRCH].
R21.0 Y2.0

ÕÕÕ
R20.1 R2.2

ÕÕÕ
R0.4
The same address is searched and
the cursor shifts to this position.
R0.5 R10.5

(b) Method of specifying the address by input

Input the address of the relay coil to be searched by both address
and numeric keys, and then press the soft key [W–SRCH].
The specified address relay coil is searched from the program of
the cursor part currently displayed on the screen to the end of the
program.
When the specified address relay coil is found, the program part
is displayed on the screen, and the cursor shifts to the relay coil.
If no relay coil is found as a result of the search, an error occurs.
(5) Soft key [N–SRCH]
This displays the ladder with the specified NET number from the top
of the screen. If the number is not keyed in, but the [N–SRCH] key
is pressed, the display is scrolled down by one NET.
(6) Soft key [S–SRCH]
Key in the functional instruction name or number and press the
[S–SRCH] key to start searching the functional instruction. When the
[S–SRCH] key is pressed during execution of a functional
instruction, the functional instruction with the same number as this
instruction is searched.
(7) Searching with cursor keys (<²> , <³> )
D Key in the address or symbol and press the cursor to start searching
the NET No.
D Key in the NET NO. and press the cursor key to start searchng the
NET NO.

1118
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

D Key in the functional instruction name or functional instruction

number starting with “S” and press the cursor key to start searching
the functional instruction.
Example) Key in “END1” or “S1” and press the cursor to search
functional instruction END1.

4.9.9 The sequence program with multiple NETs is copied in units of NETs.
Specify the NET to be copied and specify the copy position with the
Copying a Sequence
cursor. When copying, the number of copies can also be specified.
Program
1 Copying
Move the cursor to the NET you want to copy and press the [COPY]
key. The NET you want to copy will be displayed in yellow (in the
case of Mate, in reversal display).
2 Copying multiple NETs
Move the cursor with the cursor UP/DOWN key, [C–UP] key,
[C–DOWN] key, or [SEARCH] key to display in yellow the NET to
be copied. (In the case of Mate, in reversal display.) Further, if you
in a numerical value and press the [C–UP] or [C–DOWN] key, you
can scroll up or down the screen by the number of times specified by
this value.
3 Setting the NET to be copied
Press the [UNTIL] key.
4 Specifying the copying address
Copying is performed by the [TO] key. At this time, the NET is
copied in the direction above the cursor. If the number of copies is
keyed in before the [TO] key is pressed, the NET is copied that
specified number of times.
5 Further, if the NET you want to copy is already known, if the cursor
is moved to the first NET and the number of NETs is keyed in, then
by pressing the [COPY] key, steps 1 to 3 can be omitted.

INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE

UNTIL CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

TO CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

CAUTION
An error NET cannot be copied.

1119
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.9.10 A sequence program with multiple NETS is moved in units of NETs.

Moving a Sequence Specify the NET to be moved and specify the move position with the
cursor. When moving, the number of moves can also be specified.
Program
1 Moving
Move the cursor to the NET you want to move and press the [MOVE]
key. The NET you want to move will be displayed in yellow. (In the
case of Mate, in reversal display.)
2 Moving multiple NETs
Move the cursor with the cursor UP/DOWN key, [C–UP] key,
[C–DOWN] key, or [SEARCH] key to display in yellow the NET to
be moved. (In the case of Mate, in reversal display.) Further, if you
key in a numerical value and press the [C–UP] or [C–DOWN] key,
you can scroll up or down the screen by the number of times specified
by this value.
3 Setting the NET to be moved
Press the [UNTIL] key.
4 Specifying the moving address
Moving is performed by the [TO] key. At this time, the NET is
moved in the direction above the cursor.
5 Further, if the NET you want to move is already known, if the cursor
is moved to the first NET and the number of NETs is keyed in, then
by pressing the [MOVE] key, steps 1–3 can be omitted.

INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE

UNTIL CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

TO CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP

CAUTION
An error NET cannot be moved.

1120
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.9.11 (1) Symbol and comment data display

Symbol Data Display Symbol data and comment are displayed together with a ladder
diagram on the screen as follows.
When symbol data and comment are defined in signal addresses in the
program, the signal name and comment are displayed as shown in the
above diagram.
When converting the symbol and address display, press the shift key
[ADRESS or SYMBOL].
(2) Symbol input and search in the sequence program
When symbol data is defined in signal addresses in the sequence
program, input and reference can be performed by the symbols.
(Address and symbol are only different in operation.)
If neither symbol data nor comment is defined at an address, the
address is displayed as it is.

Comment
MA SPDALM X2.4 R2.2 Y4.3 ATCALM R100.1 MRDY (within 30
MACHINE characters)
READY
APCALM R5.4 MALM
MACHINE
ALARM

10 lines

R120.1 TIND D20.7 R52.1

APC

Signal name An address is displayed if a symbol is

(within 6 characters) not defined.

1121
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

4.9.12 The main function of each soft key can be directly selected from the
Compressed Input by [COMAND] key.
[COMAND] Key After keying in the characters shown below, press the [COMAND] key.
[ ] shows parts that can be omitted. Further, the ”n” appearing after the
characters signifies that it is also posssible to input a numerical value. For
example, after keying in ”D2”, pressing the [COMAND] key results in the
same operation as keying in 2 and pressing the [DELNET] key.
I [NSERT]
D [ELNET] [n ]
A [DRESS]
SY [MBOL]
S [EARCH]
C [OPY] [n ]
M [OVE] [n ]
n :numerical value
The creation and search of programs is performed by pressing the
software keys of the above menu.

NOTE
The software keys [ or ] and [ or ] are used to
create or delete the upper left vertical line or the upper right
vertical line on the ladder diagram. The solid line display of
the vertical line indicates creation; the dotted line display of
the vertical line indicates deletion. As to which menu will
appear above the software keys, is decided by the ladder
diagram form and the cursor position.

4.9.13 In the program menu shown below, press the extreme left software key.
Ending Edit of a
Sequence Program

FUNCTN or or COMAND

CAUTION
When an error NET exists, ERROR NET NO. is displayed
and you cannot end the edit. End after correcting the
erroneous NET.

1122
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.10
INPUT/OUTPUT OF
LADDER PROGRAM
WITH P–G AND
FLOPPY
CASSETTE/FA CARD

4.10.1 The ladder program can be stored in or fetched out of a floppy cassette/FA
General card by connecting P–G and floppy cassette adapter/FA card adapter by
using this function enables reading the program stored in a floppy
cassette/FA card by using PMC RAM into P–G or reading the program
stored in a floppy cassette/FA card by using P–G into PMC RAM. The
usable adapters are as follows:
D FANUC floppy cassette adapter (A13B–0150–B001)/floppy cassette
(A87L–0001–0039)
D FA card adapter (A13B–0148–B001)/FA card (A87B–0001–0108)

4.10.2 When using the FANUC floppy cassette adapter/FA card adapter, change
Setting I/O Commands the settings of the input/output devices by the following ‘IO commands’.
1 Press the R3 key on the R key menu screen. ‘REQUEST=’ is
displayed lower left on the screen, and keying in is permitted.
2 Key in ‘IO BCA, CN2, F13, F14 [NL]’. The floppy cassette
adapter/FA card adapter is assigned to channel 2.
3 To return the assignment to channel 2 to PMC WRITER, key in ‘IO
AUX, CN2, F9 [NL]’.

4.10.3 1 Turn on F13 key.

Program Input (Turn on F12 too, when C language program is included.)
2 Key in the menu No. ‘3 [NL]’.
3 (For PMC–SC only) Enter the type of a ROM module to be used.
(See the following note for selecting ROM module B or C.)
SELECT THE TYPE OF ROM MODULE ACCORDING TO THE
FOLLOWING NO.
ROM MODULE 0:A, 1:B, 2:C
No. =
4 The message is displayed lower left on the screen.
SET BC & KEY IN ‘OK’ OR ‘NO’
BC = OK <FILE NO. OR NEXT>
BC =
5 Set the floppy cassette/FA card in the adapter, and enter the following
data.
6 ‘OK 1 [NL]’ (specify file No.) or ‘OK NEXT [NL]’ (read the next
file).

1123
4. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

7 The screen changes, and reading the program from the floppy
cassette/FA card starts.
8 When the program reading ends normally, the screen will
automatically return to the programmer menu. If any error is detected
during the program reading, ‘PART=’ is displayed lower left on the
screen. Check the error contents, and key in ‘E [NL]’. The screen
will return to the programmer menu.

CAUTION
When ROM module B or C is selected during use of
SYSTEM P Mate, the program is overlaid. In this case,
insert the work floppy disk for the external memory into drive
1.

4.10.4 1 Turn on F14 key.

Program Output (Turn on F12 too, when C language program is included.)
2 Key in the menu No. ‘5 [NL]’.
3 The message is displayed lower left on the screen.
SET BC & KEY IN ‘OK’ OR ‘NO’
BC = OK <INT OR ADD OR FILE NO.>
BC =
4 Set the floppy cassette/FA card in the adapter, and enter the following
data.
5 ‘OK INT [NL]’ (write at the floppy head),
‘OK ADD [NL]’ (write in the next file) or ‘OK1 [NL]’ (specify file
No.).

CAUTION
When specifying file number, put the numbers in the
ascending order. If the file No. located at the middle of a
floppy disk is specified, the files after that will be deleted.

6 The screen changes, and writing the program into the floppy
cassette/FA card starts.
7 When the program writing ends normally, the screen will
automatically return to the programmer menu. If any error is detected
during the program reading, ‘PART=’ is displayed lower left on the
screen. Check the error contents, and key in ‘E [NL]’. The screen
will return to the programmer menu.

1124
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION

4.10.5 1 Turn on F13 key.

Program Collation (Turn on F12 too, when C language program is included.)
2 Key in the menu No. ‘7 [NL]’.
3 The following operations are the same as those after 3 in ‘Program
input’.

CAUTION
For the program which is output from PMC–SA1/SA2/SB
RAM board to the floppy cassette/FA card by specifying
LADDER of ALL, there is no problem in the input/collation. It
is impossible to make input/collation for the program which is
output by specifying PARAM.

1125
5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

5 FILE EDITING FUNCTION

1126
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION

5.1 This function edits floppy disk data in the unit of file. When key in only
<NL> the menu screen of R key appears key in R3 key on the R key menu.
GENERAL ’REQUEST=’ will be displayed on the left below part of the screen to
show a key–in enable condition.

NOTE
The format for file designation is as follows:
[drive No.] @ file name
: file No.

The file attributes are as shown below.

(1) File number
(2) File name
(3) File creation date
(4) Identification of protection file (protect)
(5) File size
(6) Multi–volume number
These file attributes are attached when writing data into floppy disk.
When writing, the next floppy disk set request message is displayed, so
specify date and protection file.

File editing command table

Name of Contents inputted from keyboard
Contents of jobs command (NL key is inputted at the end of a
(Instruction) command)
Display of file name, or file FDLIST FDLI [D, [P,] [S,] [F,]
size [L,] File designation

Change of file name, date, RENAME P ] [,/date]

etc. RENA file designation [,
[,@ new file name] NP

Deletion of file SCRATCH SCRA file designation

File area condensation CONDENSE COND [drive No.]
Copy of file REMOVE M
(This command is REMO [ ,] [file designation]
A
effective for SYSTEM P INT
series with 2–floppy disk [, ] [, P ] [,/date]
ADD NP
unit.)
[,@ new. file name]

Set FD, and key in ’OK’, KILL, or ’NO’.

FD=OK <INT or ADD,> <P or NP,> </data>
<drive> <@name>
FD=_

1127
5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

Set the floppy disk and key in as follows.

OK INT. P , [/date] [drive] [@ file name]
ADD NP
NO
KILL

When reading, the following floppy set request message is displayed.

Set FD, and key in ’OK’, KILL, or ’NO’.
FD=OK <drive.> <@name or : nember>
FD=_

Set floppy disk and key in as follows.

OK [drive number] @ file name
: file number
NO
KILL

In file editing function, the above floppy disk set request message key
input parameter can also be used. Now, parameter used in common here
here has the following meaning. Specify ’OK’, ’NO’, ’KILL’ and instruct
the answer to the set request.
OK . . . . After instructing execution of read and write, specify
parameter.
NO . . . . Cancel read/write to floppy only.
KILL . . Cancel the specified process.
Parameters instructing details of read and write is as follows.

1128
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION

Parameter Function Notes

INT When writing, write from the head of When omitted, it is regarded as
the floppy ADD. If INT is specified to
protection file, an error generaters.
ADD When writing, add after exising fie
P Prepare as protection file When omitted, it is regarded as NP.
Ready files can be changed by
NP Prepare as ordinary file RENAME command.
Date Specify file preparation date with 6 Blank when omitted.
numbers
Drive number Specify drive number 0 or 1 set with When omitted, it is regarded as 0.
read/write floppy disk. See Note).
0 ; Upper unit
1; Lower unit
@ File name Specify file name (Max. 17 Always specify when writing.
characters). When reading, the first When reading, if omitted, the file is
name correspond–ing to the valid.
specified names is vallid.
; File number When reading, specify the With the FDLIST command, file
necessary file number after the :. number and file name list can be
displayed.

CAUTION
When specifying drive number and file name or file number,
specify without separating, as follows.
Example) 0 @ ABC or 1 : 5

When displaying set request message, drive number is decided by the

system, and ’FD0=’ or ’FD1=’ is displayed, instead of the ’FD=’
message, to check the drive (unit) to be used. If a drive number is specified
then, it will be ignored. (FD0 shows drive 0, and FD1, drive 1).

1129
5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

5.2 (1) General form of command

CONFIGURATION OF Operation Space Operand
COMMAND Command name or its _ List of one or more parameters delimited
abbreviated form by delimiter symbol ’ , ’ (comma).
(4 leading characters)

A command name consists of plural alphabetic characters, and it can

be abbreviated by four leading characters.
An operand consists of parameters peculiar to commands and
parameters specified in floppy disk mounting request message.
(2) Execution of operands and commands
If operands are fully designated, a command is executed without
displaying any floppy disk mounting request message.
However, a certain command may require many parameters. If these
parameters cannot be recalled, specify the command name only.
Necessary parameters are indicated in the floppy disk mounting
request message. Accordingly, parameters can be input from the
keyboard according to this display. The message may be displayed
twice separately according to commands. (Old and new names are
requested separately in RENAME command, for example.)

1130
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION

5.3 This command displays the attributes of files in the floppy disk, such as
file name, file size, etc.
FDLIST COMMAND —
FILE ATTRIBUTE a) Input format
DISPLAY [D,] [P,] [S,] [F,]
FDLIST
[L,]

@ file name
[Drive No.]
: file No.

b) Operand
D: Display of file creation date consisting of 6 characters
P: Identification display of protection files
S: Display of file size
F: Display of size of unoccupied area
L: Executes all display by parameters D, P, S, F.
@ file name Displays a file having the designated
file name or designated
: file No. file number only. If this designation
is omitted, all files are treated as
processing objects.

c) Function
This command displays the information (attributes) on the floppy
disk files.
If no attribute to be displayed is designated, the file number, file
name, and multi–volume number only are displayed. The following
example shows the display of all information (L designation)
NO. FILE NAME V. DATE SIZE P.
001 DATA1 830928 72 P
002 DATA2 831028 60
003 DATA3 831028 8 P
**** DELETED FILE **** 10
005 DATA4 901022 10 P
006 DATA5 901022 5
FILE USED AREA = 155
DELETED FILE AREA = 10
FREE AREA = 1019

NOTE
The numeric characters shown in SIZE, FILE USED AREA,
DELETED FILE AREA, and FREE AREA are displayed
assuming that 256 characters are 1.

1131
5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

5.4 This command designates a change of the file name, file creation date, and
the designation of protection file.
RENAME COMMAND
— FILE ATTRIBUTE a) Input format
CHANGE @ file name P
RENAME [drive No.] [,/date] [@ new file name]
: file No. NP

Designation of file to be changed Designation of file to be changed

b) Function
File attributes are renewed when they are designated by operand
parameters. Attributes which are not designated are stored as they
are. Protection files can be cancelled, but neither dates nor file names
are changeable. The designation of protection files must be cancelled
once before changing their attributes.
If all operands are omitted, the system displays an input message to
request the designation of a file to be changed. When the file to be
changed is designated by keying operation, a message is displayed
to input attributes of the file to be changed by keying operation.
Designate new data.
If the file to be changed only is designated together with the
command, the system asks the file attributes to be changed.
(RENAME: 5 <NL>, for example)
Old attributes (B) and new attributes (A) are displayed by executing
this command as shown below, for example.
Example)
RENAME :3, @ NEWNAME <F11>NL>
RENA : 3,@NEWNAME
NO. FILE NAME V. DATE P.
B: 003 DATA3 901020
A: 003 NEWNAME 901020

1132
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION

5.5 This command deletes files of floppy disk.

SCRATCH COMMAND a) Input format
— DELETION OF @ file name
SCRATCH [drive No.]
FILES : file No.

b) Function
This command deletes the designated file. Even if the file name is
displayed by FDLIST, the file name is not displayed any longer. The
area occupied by the deleted file must be released by CONDENSE
command before writing new data into the area.

5.6 This command releases the deleted file area to be employable.

CONDENSE a) Input format
COMMAND — CONDENSE [drive No.]
RELEASE OF b) Function
DELETED AREA The area occupied by the file deleted by SCRATCH command cannot
be employed for writing new data under that condition. By executing
this command, all unemploy–able areas can be released. Since it
takes time to execute this command, it is recommended to arrange
these areas when there are many files to be deleted and the residual
capacity of the floppy disk is small.

1133
5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15

5.7 This command copies files to another floppy disk by using two floppy
disk units.
REMOVE COMMAND
a) Input format
— FILE COPY
M input drive @ file name INT , P , [/date] , @ new file
REMOVE A, No. file No. ADD NP name

Input designation Output designation

Designation of
copying method
b) Operand
No. M,A designation:
Specified file is copied with specified file attributes.
M (manual):
Copies designated files one by one.
Floppy disk mounting request message is displayed every file to ask
if the file is to be copied or not. If input file is not designated, all files
becomes the object to be copied.
If new file name is not designated, input file name is produced.
Accordingly, the output designation of REMOVE command is
meaningless, because the request for output designation is performed
every file.
i) When a file name is designated as an input;
All coincident files having the designated length are treated as
processing objects. If @A is desig–nated, for example, all files
starting with A are asked.
ii) When a file number is designated as an input;
Files from a file having the designated file number to the last file
are treated as processing objects.
A (auto):
All files conforming to the designated conditions are copied. The
output designation file name is meaningless. However, P, NP and /
date are designated to all copied files with new attributes.
i)
If the file name or file number is not designated by input
designation, all files of the input floppy disk are copied.
ii) If the file name or file number is designated in input designation,
processing is done in the same way as in M designation.
c) Function
This command copies floppy disk files to another floppy disk. Files
are output to a floppy disk opposite to the drive number (0, if omitted)
designated by input designation. These files are copied by the
following three methods.
i) Copy of one file only (Neither M nor A is designated.)
(Ex. 1) REMOVE : 3,P, @ NEW <NL>
In this example, the input/output designations are as
follows; Input designation : 3rd file of drive No.0 floppy
disk

1134
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION

Output designation : File name is ”NEW”, drive No.1

floppy disk with protection
ii) The system asks every file to check if the file is to be copied or
not. (M designation)
(Ex. 2) REMOVE M,1 @ A <NL>
In this example, the system asks to copy or not every file
with file name starting with ”A” of drive No.1 floppy
disk.
A change of attributes such as file name, date, and file
protection can be designated.
iii) All designated files are copied. (A designation)
(Ex. 3) REMOVE A,: 3, INT,/830920 <NL>
In this example, files with file name starting with ”A”
and with file No.3 and later of drive No.0 floppy disk are
copied to drive No.1 floppy disk from the head of it with
designated date ”830930”. The copied file names cannot
be changed in this method.
When this command is executed, input file attributed (I) and output
file attributes (O) are displayed. The next display example shows the
execution of ’REMOVE A, 1 @TO, INT, P <NL>’.
NO. FILE NAME V.DATE P.
I:001 T01 ZX 1. 100/40 830920
O:001 T01 ZX 1. 100/40 830920 P
I:002 T02 ZX 1. 150/50 830920
O:002 T02 ZX 1. 150/50 830920 P
I:003 T04 ZX 1. 100/50 830920
O:003 T04 ZX 1. 100/50 830920 P
I:004 T05 ZX 1. 20/50 830920
O:004 T05 ZX 1. 20/50 830920 P
If REMOVE command is only designated, key in operands according
to the request message. The following are general designation format
for file copy.
i) Without M, A designation (One file is copied.)
0 @ file name INT P
REMOVE , ,
1 : file No. ADD NP

[,/ date] [, @ new file name] <NL>

ii) With M designation (request message is displayed for each
objected file.)
0 @ file name
REMOVE M,
1 : file No

iii) With A designation (All subjected files are copied.)

0 @ file name INT P
REMOVE , ,
1 : file No. ADD NP

[,/ date] <NL>

1135
B–61863E/15 Index
Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

ƠAơ ƠBơ
About connection log of Ethernet, 616, 963 Block step, 997

About the FS15i PMC–NB6 programmer, 510 Brief screen, 887

About the FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 programmer, 510

ADD (addition), 249
ADDB (binary addition), 251
ƠCơ
C input/output, 568
Addition of system keep relays, 838, 841
CALL (conditional subprogram call), 341
Additions to sequence programs, 1113
Calling screen, 893
Address, 61
CALLU (unconditional subprogram call), 342
Address change, 770
Caution screen of the setting parameter for the selectable I/O link
Address change of sequence program, 544 assignment function, 848
Address of counter (C), 110 Cautions for subroutines, 389

Address of data table (D), 114 Chinese character code, Hiragana code, and special code list, 1588
Clearing the PMC parameter, 557
Address of keep relay and nonvolatile memory control (K), 112
Clearing the sequence program, 424, 556
Addresses, 374
Clearing the sequence program and condensation of the sequence
Addresses between PMC and CNC (PMC´NC), 79 program, 556
Addresses between PMC and machine tool, 80 CNC ³ Offline Programmer, 1522
Addresses between PMC and machine tool (PMC´MT), 80 COD (code conversion), 199

Addresses for message selection displayed on CRT (A), 108 CODB (binary code conversion), 202
Coding (step 5), 39
Addresses, signal names, comments, and line numbers, 374
COIN (coincidence check), 230
Alarm message (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/
SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6), 1553 Collation of program, 1105
Alarm message (PMC–SB7), 1560 Collation of source programs, 1105
Alarm message and countermeasure, 818, 828, 898, 919 Collective monitor function, 765

Alarm message list, 1552 Collective monitor function (PMC–SB7), 892

Collective monitor screen, 1044
Alarm screen (ALARM), 440, 651
COM (common line control), 207
ALLOW PMC STOP (PMC–SB7: K902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2), 855
COME (common line Control end), 213
Alter, 1085
Comments, 375
Alteration of sequence programs, 536
Communication Status, 615
AND, 128
Communication status, 961
AND (logical AND), 320 COMP (comparison), 226
AND. NOT, 128 Comparison with the function of FS15–B (PMC–NB/NB2), 662
AND. STK, 131 Compatibility of ladder diagram, 1031
Applicable FANUC ladder editions, 1515 Compatibility of PMC between Series 15i–MODEL A and B, 1551
Applications, 382 Compatibility of PMCs for Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL A and B,
1533
Arbitrary functional instructions, 305
Compatibility with CNC basic software, 1508
Area managed by the system program, 103 Compatibility with Series 21–MODEL B, 1550
Assignment of built–in I/O card, 100 Compatible with Series 0, 1546
Assignment of I/O module addresses, 82 COMPB (comparison between binary data), 228
Automatic operation when the power is turned on, 424 Component units, 512, 1059, 1510
Automatic start of trace setting, 936 Component units and connections, 511, 1058, 1509
Automatic tracing function at power on, 443 Compress the sequence program, 557

AXCTL (axis control by PMC), 348 Compressed input by [COMAND] key, 1122
Condense, 1512

i–1
 Index B–61863E/15

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Condense command – release of deleted area, 1133 Data transfer between NB (4047 series) and NB (4048 series), 1528
Configuration and operation of step–sequence programs, 988 Data transfer between NB/NB2 (4048 series) and FANUC LADDER,
1527
Configuration of command, 1130
DCNV (data conversion), 222
Confirming the ladder mnemonics, 627
DCNVB (extended data conversion), 224
Connecting component units, 517
Debugging, 597
Connecting the I/O card, 1501
DEC (decode), 177
Connecting the I/O unit, 1501
DECB (binary decoding), 179
Connecting the operator’s panel for FS 0 with FS16, FS18, FS21, or
Power Mate, 1497 Delete, 1089
Connection, 1501 Delete of sequence program, 539

Connection of components, 1511 Delete of symbol data and comment, 550

Connections of units, 1060 Deleting a sequence program, 1116

Constitution, 771 Deleting title data, 528

Continuous data entry, 685 Deletion of a tool management data (*low–speed response), 1354
Deletion of programs, 1106
Convergence of selective sequence, 993
Descriptions of displayed items, 593
Convergence of simultaneous sequence, 995
Detail screen, 885
Conversion, 1495
Details of basic instructions, 122
Copy a ladder program [CPYLAD], 587
DIFD (falling edge detection), 317
Copy I/O module data [CPYMDL], 588
Difference of status of signals between 1st level and 2nd level, 54
Copy message data [CPYMSG], 587
DIFU (rising edge detection), 316
Copy symbol data and comment data [CPYSYM], 587
Direct editing by ladder diagram, 1108
Copy the sequence programs [CPYALL], 588
DISP (message display) (PMC–SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/
Copy title data [CPYTTL], 587 SC3/SC4 Only), 268
Copying a sequence program, 1119 DISPB, 282
Copying message data (COPY), 555 Display format for parameters, 879
Copying the sequence program, 542 Display of ladder diagram, 1091
Corresponding function, 1030 Display of signal status (STATUS), 439
Counter screen (COUNTR), 476, 686 Display PMC input/output signals and internal relay (PMCDGN),
647
Creating a program, 387
Displayed items, 596
Creation of interface specifications (steps 1 to 3), 38
Displaying and setting the configuration status of I/O devices
Creation of ladder diagram (step 4), 38 (IOCHK), 454
Cross reference display, 558 Displaying input code (DSPMOD), 555
CTR (counter), 182 Displaying of sequence program, 1015, 1034
CTRB (fixed counter), 188 Displaying run status, 1045
CTRC (counter), 190 Displaying the contents of memory (M.SRCH), 444
Displaying the GDT (global descriptor table), 591
Displaying the memory allocation information of a user program
ƠDơ
Coded in C., 594
Displaying the running state of a user task (USRDGN), 452
Data display and setting (title, symbol, ladder program, comment,
message, I/O module), 1078 Displaying title data, 437
Distribution I/O connection I/O module and distribution I/O opera-
Data input to and output from other devices, 581
tor’s panel I/O module assignment methods, 94
Data keys and screen scroll key, 1066 DIV (division), 261
Data number, data attribute, data length, data area, 1487 DIVB (binary division), 263
Data table (DATA), 482, 689 Divergence of selective sequence, 993
DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (PMC–SB7: K900.7, PMC–SA1: Divergence of simultaneous sequence, 994
K17.7), 856
Dividing display of ladder diagram, 501
Data transfer between NB (4047 series) and FANUC LADDER,
1527 Do–while statement, 1579

i–2
B–61863E/15 Index

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

DSCH (data search), 234 Examples of structured programming, 381

DSCHB (binary data search), 237 Exclusive control for functional instructions, 1011
DUMP display on ladder diagram, 493 Execution method, 386
Execution of a sequence program, 563
Execution of step sequence, 984
ƠEơ Execution of Trace, 659
Execution of trace, 932
EDIT ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K901.6, PMC–SA1: K18.6), 852
Execution procedure of sequence program, 43
Editing a character string in message data, 554
Execution time, 407
Editing character strings of symbol data and comment data, 551
EXIN (external data input), 293
Editing character strings of title data, 529
Expansion of symbol size, 841
Editing end, 1092
Extended ladder instructions, 999
Editing for Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3), 1507
Editing function of ladder diagram, 1025, 1052
Editing ladder mnemonics, 626
Editing of sequence program (EDIT), 527
ƠFơ
Editing symbol data and comment at once, 544 F keys (F1 to F0), 1064

Editing the sequence program (EDIT), 625 FANUC LADDER (system P series), 1518

Editor screen of message data, 822 FANUC LADDER system floppy loading, 1073

Editor screen of symbol/comment data, 811 FANUC LADDER, FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADER–III,
ladder editing packages, 1516
Editor screen of system parameter, 832
FDLIST command – file attribute display, 1131
Emergency stop signal (*ESP), 1502
File editing function, 1126
Enabling automatic debugging at power–on, 601
Floppy list screen, 795
END (end of a ladder program), 340 For MDI Units other than Standard MDI Units (for FS20 PMC–SA1
End of block step, 998 and SA3), 424
END1 (1st level sequence program end), 167 For statement, 1581
END2 (2nd level sequence program end), 168 For the FS15 (PMC–NB), 505
END3 (end of 3rd level sequence) (PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/ For the FS16 (PMC–SC, PMC–SC3, or PMC–SC4), 505
NB2/NB6/NB7 only), 169 Forced input/output function, 461, 674
Ending edit of a sequence program, 1122 Forced input/output screen, 679
Ending ladder mnemonics editing, 630 Forcibly stopping the sequence program, 565
Entering data on the program check screen (*low–speed response) Format and details of the control data of the WINDR functional
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1229 instruction, 1375
Entering title data, 528 Format and details of the control data of the WINDW functional
Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor (*low–speed instruction, 1428
response), 1233 Formats and details of control data, 1147
Entry screen of message data, 825 FS15i PMC–NB6 operating procedure, 425
Entry screen of symbol/comment, 814 FS16i–LA assignment, 93
EOR (exclusive OR), 318 FS16i/18i/21i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 operating procedure, 425
Error codes list (for FANUC Ladder P–G), 1139 Function, 385, 1143, 1369, 1451, 1495
Error details, 634 Function for displaying signal waveforms (ANALYS), 446
Error list, 638 Function for storing data in memory, 445
Error messages (for EDIT), 618 Function of copying symbol and comment data, 552
Error messages (for I/O), 620 Functional instruction data table editor screen, 915
Error messages (for ladder mnemonics editing), 632 Functional instruction data table viewer screen, 882
Error messages ansd solutions, 773 Functional instruction list screen, 914
Example, 945 Functional instruction TRSET, 1000
Example for setting parameters, 858 Functional instruction WINDR, 1371
Example of step sequence programs, 1572 Functional instruction WINDW, 1373

i–3
 Index B–61863E/15

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Functional instructions, 135 Input/output method to office programmer (P–G Mate/Mark II)
(fixed 9600bit/sec.), 635
Functions for displaying memory areas and debugging the program
(MONIT), 589 Input/output of ladder program with P–G and floppy cassette/FA
card, 1123
Functions of processing, 1056
Inputting a multi–byte character (D.CHAR), 555
Insert, 1088
Insert of sequence program, 536
ƠGơ Interlocking, 56
General rules, 1005 Internal relay addresses (R), 101
Graphical symbols, 971 Interrupt enable/disable/clear, 407
Interrupt processing, 405
Interrupt program, 405
ƠHơ Interrupt–type PMC function, 402
Help screen, 1092 IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1), 856

HIDE PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.6, PMC–SA–1: K19.6), 853

HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0),
852 ƠJơ
Hierarchy of monitor, 1035
JMP (jump), 214
How to pick up a ladder diagram net, 768
JMP Instructions with Label Specification, 391
How to set at NC parameter, 610 JMPB (label jump), 345
How to set at NC parameter (Power Mate–D/H), 611 JMPC (label jump), 346
How to set at PMC screen, 609, 955 JMPE (jump end), 219
Jump, 996

ƠIơ
I/O error messages, 585 ƠKơ
I/O Link connecting check screen, 456 Keep relay (KEEPRL), 476
I/O link connecting check screen, 952 Keep relay screen (KEEPRL), 687
I/O Link connection unit assignment, 89 Keep relays used in the system, 860
I/O Link–II parameter setting screen, 458 Key switch signals (Xn, Xn+2), 1502
I/O screen, 779 Keyboard of system P series, 1063
I/O screen error messages (PMC–NB6), 801
I/O signals to CNC, 53
I/O unit address setting (MODULE), 546 ƠLơ
I/O Unit MODEL B assignment, 91 Label, 996
If else statement, 1583 Label addresses (JMPB, JMPC, LBL) (L), 118
Implementation techniques, 381 Ladder debugging function, 602
Infinite number of relay contacts, 378 Ladder diagram display, 492
Initial block step, 998 Ladder diagram editor function (PMC–SB7), 899
Initial step, 991 LADDER diagram editor screen, 720

Input of program, 1093 Ladder diagram format, 373, 377

Input PMC parameters from MDI panel, 474 LADDER diagram monitor (PMC–SB7), 864

Input signal processing, 52 Ladder diagram monitor and editor, 697

LADDER diagram monitor screen, 700, 866
Input with a katakana identification code, 555
Ladder diagram monitor screen, 1044
Input/outpupt signal processing, 406
Ladder password function, 426
Input/output ladder/PMC–parameter by DPL/MDI, 635
Ladder screen, 1018, 1028
Input/output method to FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (fixed
4800bit/sec.), 635 Lader diagram editor screen, 900

i–4
B–61863E/15 Index

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

LBL (label), 347 MOVOR (data transfer after logical sum), 206
Level up of input/output function with memory card, 1520 MOVW (transfer of 2 bytes), 313
Limitations in SYSTEM P Mate, 1108 MUL (multiplication), 257
Limitations with the SYSTEM P Mate, 1072 MULB (binary multiplication), 259
Limited function, 1551 Multi–language alarm/operator message display function setting
screen, 847
Line numbers, 375
Multiple data input, 474
List of window functions, 1144
LOAD key (system program loading key), 1064

ƠNơ
Loading of floppy, 1072
Loading the standard ladder (for Power Mate–D/F PMC–PA1 and
PA3), 425 NB/NB2 data compatibility, 1527
Location search, 1089 Net editor screen, 907
Low–speed response and high–speed response of window function, New–register of a tool management data (*low–speed response),
1143, 1370 1344
Nonvolatile memory, 364
NOP (no operation), 362
ƠMơ NOT (logical NOT), 324

Memory card list screen, 786 Note on programming, 925

Menu screen of miscellaneous data in sequence program, 807 Notes, 949

Message data input, 554 Notes on input/output signals over a network, 55

Message data setting (MESSAGE), 553 Notes on using an MDI keyboard without cursor keys (when using
the FS20 PMC–MODEL SA1/SA3), 584
Method for entering PMC parameters, 684
NUME (definition of constant), 265
Migration from the PMC–NB/NB2 to the PMC–NB6, 1532 NUMEB (definition of binary constants), 266
Migration from the PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 to the PMC–SB7, 1533
Migration from the Series 0 and Series 21–B to Series 0i–A, 1546
Migration of ladder programs between different models, 1529
ƠOơ
Migration of ladder programs from Power Mate–D/H to Power Mate
i–D/H, 1530 Offline Programmer ³ CNC, 1524

Miscellaneous data in sequence program, 806 On–line debugging function (only for Power Mate–D/H and Power
Mate i–D/H), 636
Miscellaneous item, 379
On–line edit, 503
MMC3 R (MMC–III window data read), 326
Online function, 607, 953
MMC3W (MMC–III window data write), 329
Online function by Ethernet, 957
MMCWR (reading MMC window data) (other than PMC–PA1/PA3),
308 Online function by ethernet, 612

MMCWW (writing MMC window data) (other than PMC–PA1/PA3), Online setting screen, 608, 954
310 Operation, 441, 444, 446, 558, 591, 594, 597, 1069, 1522
Modification procedure, 1496 Operation (PMC–SB7), 1033
Modifying the converted sequence program, 1496 Operation after execution of trace, 660, 933
Modifying the ladder mnemonics, 628 Operations, 571, 869, 883, 888
Modifying the values of signals by forced input/output, 469 Operations to enable the forced I/O function, 678
Monitor time screen, 1023 OR, 128
Monitoring elapsed time, 1022 OR (logical OR), 322
MOVB (transfer of 1 byte), 312 OR. NOT, 128
MOVD (transfer of 4 bytes), 315 OR. STK, 131
MOVE (logical product transfer), 204 Other setting screens, 487
Moving a sequence program, 1120 Other window functions, 1493
Moving the sequence program, 543 Outline, 942
MOVN (transfer of an arbitrary number of bytes), 314 Outline of leveled up contents, 1521

i–5
 Index B–61863E/15

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Output of program, 1098 Program input, 1123

Output of result of trace, 937 Program list editor screen, 760, 916
Output signal processing, 52 Program list viewer screen, 753, 885, 1036
Outputting to and inputting from flash ROM, 788 Program output, 1124
Outputting to and inputting from floppy, 791 PROGRAMMER ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1:
K17.1), 851
Outputting to and inputting from memory cards, 782
Programmer menu screen, 1074
Outputting to and inputting from other input/output devices, 796
Programmer protection function, 850
Override signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and program protect key signal
(KEY), 1502 Programming, 972
Programming from keyboard, 1084
PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.7, PMC–SA1: K19.7),
854
ƠPơ Protection of each function of I/O screen, 856
Paper command, 1101 PSGN2 (position signal output 2), 358
Parameter, 1511 PSGNL (position signal output), 354
Parameter display on ladder diagram, 494
Parameter menu (PMC–SB7), 1505
Parameter screen, 447, 598 ƠRơ
Parameter setting and display, 1075 R keys (R0 to R3), 1065
Parameter setting screen, 441, 559 RAM WRITE ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.4, PMC–SA1: K17.4),
PARI (parity check), 220 856
RD, 124
Password and switching screen, 776
RD. NOT, 125
Password protection, 774
RD. NOT. STK, 130
PMC address (S ADDRESS), 1001
RD. STK, 129
PMC basic instructions, 120
Reading a character string of the CNC program being executed in the
PMC basic manu, 643 buffer, 1241
PMC data setting and display (PMCPRM), 683 Reading a custom macro variable (*low–speed response), 1166
PMC data table, 368 Reading a custom macro variable (low–speed response), 1379
PMC I/O signal display and internal relay display (PMCDGN), 436 Reading a parameter (*low–speed response), 1158
PMC ladder diagram display (PMCLAD), 491 Reading a parameter (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1238
PMC menu selection procedure by softkey, 430
Reading a parameter (setting data) (low–speed response), 1378
PMC operation for loader control function, 429
Reading a skip position (stop position of skip operation (G31)) of
PMC parameter format, 1540 controlled axes, 1186
PMC parameters setting and display (PMCPRM), 472 Reading a skip position (stop position of skip operation (G31)) of
PMC programmer (CRT/MDI or PDP/MDI) [ladder editing function], controlled axes (low–speed response), 1386
1509 Reading a tool management data (*low–speed response), 1356
PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) (only for the Power Mate–D/F/H), Reading a tool offset, 1150
621
Reading a tool offset (low–speed response), 1375
PMC screen transition and related soft keys, 645
Reading a workpiece origin offset value, 1377
PMC system alarm messages (PMC–SB7), 1570
Reading a workpiece origin offset value (not supported by the Power
Port setting screen, 799 Mate–D or –F), 1154
Power Mate assignment, 92 Reading A/D conversion data, 1199
Preparation before operation, 1072 Reading A/D conversion data for the feed motor, 1395
Priority of execution (1st level, 2nd level and 3rd level), 45 Reading actual spindle speeds, 1301
Procedure, 1505 Reading an estimate disturbance torque data, 1410
Processing I/O signals, 51 Reading and writing of nonvolatile memory data, 367
Program collation, 1125 Reading and writing the laser command data and laser setting data,
1456
Program configuration list (main screen), 1015, 1025
Reading clock data (date and time) (not available for Power Mate–F),
Program editing, 1078 1231

i–6
B–61863E/15 Index

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Reading clock data (low–speed response), 1407 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis, 1243, 1408
Reading CNC status information, 1247 Reading the remaining travel, 1245, 1409
Reading CNC system information, 1148 Reading the servo data of control axes, 1337
Reading detailed alarm information (*low–speed type), 1333 Reading the servo delay for controlled axes, 1188, 1387
Reading diagnosis data (*low–speed response), 1197 Reading the tool life management data (number of tool groups)
(low–speed response), 1398
Reading diagnosis data (low–speed response), 1394
Reading the tool life management data (tool group number) (low–
Reading diagnosis data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series speed response), 1397
21–TA), 1240 Reading the tool life management data (tool life counter type) (not
Reading fine torque sensing data (statistical calculation results), 1305 available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1253
Reading fine torque sensing data (store data), 1307 Reading the tool offset data according to the specified tool number,
1413
Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial interface),
1235 Reading the wire diameter offset, 1460
Reading tool lefe management data (cutter compensation number 1)
Reading machining distances, 1480 (low–speed type), 1416
Reading modal data, 1192 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (1):
Reading modal data (low–speed response), 1388 tool No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1217

Reading model data, 1476 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (2):
tool order No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA),
Reading of the comment, 1455 1219
Reading of tool setting data, 1485 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No.1) (low–
speed response), 1403
Reading real parameters (low–speed type), 1418
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No.2) (low–
Reading set data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), speed response), 1404
1239
Reading tool life management data (number of tool groups) (not
Reading setting data, 1471 available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1205
Reading setting data (*low–speed response), 1162 Reading tool life management data (number of tools) (low–speed
response), 1398
Reading signals automatically at power on, 451
Reading tool life management data (number of tools) (not available
Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of controlled for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1207
axes, 1182
Reading tool life management data (tool diameter offset number 1)
Reading the absolute position on a controlled axis, 1383 (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1287
Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay on controlled axes, Reading tool life management data (tool group No.) (not available
1190, 1387 for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1203
Reading the actual spindle speed, 1227 Reading tool life management data (tool group number) (not avail-
able for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1283
Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes, 1180
Reading tool life management data (tool group numbers) (low–speed
Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes (low–speed response), type), 1414
1383 Reading tool life management data (tool information (1) : tool No.)
Reading the CNC alarm status, 1171, 1475 (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1221
Reading the CNC alarm status (low–speed response), 1380 Reading tool life management data (tool information (2): tool order
No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1223
Reading the current program number, 1176
Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (low–speed
Reading the current program number (8–digit program numbers) response), 1405
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1281 Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (low–speed
Reading the current program number (low–speed response), 1381 type), 1417
Reading the current screen number, 1330 Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (not avail-
able for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1289
Reading the current sequence number, 1178
Reading tool life management data (tool information 2) (low–speed
Reading the current sequence number (low–speed response, 1382 response), 1406
Reading the estimate disturbance torque data, 1277 Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.
(1): tool No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA),
Reading the load current (A/D conversion data) for the spindle mo- 1213
tor, 1412
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.
Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled (2): tool order No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
axes, 1184, 1385 21–TA), 1215
Reading the machining time (low–speed response), 1411 Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.1)
(low–speed response), 1401
Reading the measured point, 1481
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation num-
Reading the parameter (*low–speed response), 1464 ber 1) (low–speed type), 1415

i–7
 Index B–61863E/15

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Reading tool life management data (tool length offset number 1) (not Search of empty pot (*low–speed response), 1342
available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1285
Search of sequence program, 540
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter type) (low–
speed response), 1400 Search of specified relay coil points in ladder diagram, 498

Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) (low–speed Search of tool management data (*low–speed response), 1364
response), 1399 Searching a sequence program, 1117
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) (not available Searching for an address (SRCH), 554
for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1211
Selectable I/O link assignment function (PMC–SB7), 941
Reading tool life management data (tool life) (low–speed response),
1399 Selecting the PMC programmer menu, 623
Reading tool life management data (tool life) (not available for Pow- Selection of program menu by soft keys, 1108
er Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1209
Selection of programmer menus by softkeys, 518
Reading tool life management data (tool No.) (not available for Pow-
er Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1225 Sequence program, 42
Reading tool life management data (tool number) (low–speed re- Sequence program check and write into ROM (steps 8 to 11), 40
sponse), 1406
Sequence program copy function, 587
Reading tool setting data by specifying tool number, 1491
Sequence program creating procedure, 3
Reading value of the P–code macro variable (*low–speed response), Sequence program entry (steps 6, 7), 40
1249
Sequence program examples, 411
Registering the tool life management data (tool group) (*low–speed
response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1255 Sequence program generation (LADDER), 531
Remove command – file copy, 1134 Sequence program input, 532, 1110
Rename command – file attribute change, 1132 Sequence program memory capacity, 59
Repetitive operation, 44 Sequence program processing time, 57
Respomse time, 406 Sequence program structuring, 49, 380
Restrictions, 396, 588 SET, 131
ROM format program, 1095, 1102, 1105 Set items, 569
ROT (rotation control), 193 Setting, 404
ROTB (binary rotation control), 196 Setting and display screen, 475
RST, 133 Setting and displaying system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM), 624
Setting function, 842
Setting I/O commands, 1123
ƠSơ Setting menu (SETING), 691

Scratch command – deletion of files, 1133 Setting of Ethernet parameters, 612, 957

Screen configuration, 894, 901, 907 Setting of I/O device, 1067

Screen display, 466 Setting of online connection, 608, 955

Setting of online connection by NC parameter, 956
Screen for displaying general settings (GENERAL), 692
Setting of sampling address, 930
Screen for displaying setting data related to C language function, 696
Setting of Trace Parameter, 653
Screen for displaying the setting data related to editing and debug-
ging, 693 Setting of trace parameter, 928
Screen for displaying traced data, 601 Setting parameter screen for the selectable I/O link assignment func-
tion, 849
Screen for setting/displaying online monitor parameters (ONLINE),
694 SETTING screen, 484
Screen of ladder debugging function, 602 Setting Screen, 890
Screen operation (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2), 1014 Setting screen, 905, 918
Screen operation for FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7, 837 Setting screen of general function, 844
Screen operation for PMC–SA1, 838 Setting the screen, 873
Screen operation for PMC–SB7, 839 Setting the transfer speed ([SPEED] soft key), 582
Screen operations, 895, 902, 908, 917 Setting/clearing OVERRIDE, 470
Screen Structure, 867 Setting/operation for enabling forced input/output, 465
Screen Structures, 883 SFT (shift register), 232

i–8
B–61863E/15 Index

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Shift of tool management data (*low–speed response), 1366 Storage to a memory card, 575
Signal address conversion (from the PMC–MODEL L/M to the Storage to Flash ROM, 573
PMC–MODEL SB/SC), 1494
Storing the sequence program into FLASH ROM (I/O) (only for the
Signal diagnosis screen, 450 Power Mate–H and Power Mate i–D/H), 633
Signal names, 375 Structure of software key in PMC, 838, 840
Signal status display (STATUS), 650 Structure of valid net, 913

Signal trace function (PMC–SB7), 926 SUB (subtraction), 253

Signal trace screen (initial screen), 927 SUBB (binary subtraction), 255

Signals for connecting the operator’s panel, 1502 Subprogram list viewer screen, 1041
Subprogram numbers (CALL, CALLU, SP) (P), 119
Soft key menu of ladder debugging function, 603
Subprogramming and nesting, 385
Soft key–based PMC menu selection procedure, 642
Substitution of sequence programs, 1113
Source program, 1093, 1098
Summary of specification of ladder program, 29
SP (subprogram), 343
Switch statement, 1585
SPCNT (spindle control), 332
Switching screens for setting parameters, 843
SPE (end of a subprogram), 344
Symbol and comment display, 497
Special uses of the R3 key, 1107
Symbol data and comment input, 550
Specification, 1004
Symbol data display, 1121
Specification and display of system parameters (SYSPRM), 1512
Symbol data search (SRCH), 550
Specification of PMCs, 5
Symbol data setting (SYMBOL), 549
Specification of step sequence, 1003 Symbols used in the ladder diagram, 376
Specifications, 384, 392, 446, 597 System alarm messages (C language function for PMC–NB/
Specifications of password, 775 NB2/NB6), 1567

Specifying addresses, 1505 System alarm messages (PMC–SB5/SB6/NB6), 1568

System alarm messages (PMC–SC), 1565
Specifying and displaying system parameters (SYSPRM), 520
System diagram of soft key, 1514
Specifying and displaying title data (TITLE), 528
System floppy, 1072
Specifying the number of the program for I/O Link, 1315
System parameter (PMC–SB7), 950
Start and stop of a sequence program, 564
Starting and stopping sequence programs, 805
Starting and stopping the on–line debugging function, 636
Starting and stopping the sequence program (RUN/STOP), 631
ƠTơ
Terminology, 975
Starting ladder mnemonics editing, 626
The operation, 771
Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet
connection), 613 The value of functional instruction parameter, 495
Starting or stopping the trace function, 442 Time monitor, 1049
Starting the sequence program, 565 Time monitor function, 1049
Step, 989 Time monitor setting screen, 1050
Step operation [STEP], 604 Time screen, 1021

Step sequence basics, 974 Timer addresses (T), 116

Step sequence corresponded C language, 1576 Timer screen, 1021

Timer screen (TIMER), 475, 685
Step sequence method, 968
Timer set time address, 175
Step sequence monitor screen, 1037
Timer, counter, keep relay, nonvolatile memory control, data table,
Step sequence screen, 1016, 1026 365
Step sequence state screen (subprogram), 1047 Title data display (TITLE), 648
Step sequence state screen (whole), 1045 Title data editor screen, 649
Stop function of break with condition [BRKCTL], 605 TMR (timer), 170
Stop of ladder diagram display by trigger of signal, 499 TMRB (fixed timer), 172
Storage and control of sequence program (steps 12 to 14), 41 TMRC (timer), 174

i–9
 Index B–61863E/15

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Trace function (TRACE), 441 Writing of tool setting data (*low–speed response), 1489
Trace screen, 443, 652 Writing real parameters (low–speed type), 1448
Transfer between data area and non–volatile memory, 1451 Writing setting data (*low–speed response), 1164
Transfer to and from a FANUC FD Cassette, 571 Writing setting data (low–speed type), 1472
Transfer to and from a FANUC LADDER, 571 Writing the feedrate, 1443
Transfer to and from a ROM WRITER, 583 Writing the measured point (*low–speed response), 1483
Transition, 992 Writing the parameter (*low–speed response), 1466
Writing the superposition move command, 1441
Writing the tool life management data (cutter compensation number
(1) : tool number) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power
ƠUơ Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1267
Writing the tool life management data (cutter compensation number
User PMC Screen (PMCMDI), 504
(2) : tool operation sequence number) (*low–speed response) (not
available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1269
Writing the tool life management data (cutter compensation number
1), 1437
ƠVơ Writing the tool life management data (cutter compensation number
Viewe/editor screen of message data, 819 2), 1437
Writing the tool life management data (tool condition (1) : tool num-
Viewer screen of message data, 819 ber) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F,
Viewer screen of symbol/comment data, 809 Series 21–TA), 1271

Viewer screen of system parameter, 830 Writing the tool life management data (tool group number), 1434

Viewer/editor of symbol/comment data, 809 Writing the tool life management data (tool information 1), 1438

Viewer/editor of system parameter, 830 Writing the tool life management data (tool information 2), 1438
Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation
number 1), 1436
Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation
ƠWơ number 2), 1436
Writing the tool life management data (tool length offset number (1) :
What is a sequence program?, 36 tool number) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power
While statement, 1577 Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1263

Window function description (FS16–W), 1459 Writing the tool life management data (tool length offset number (2) :
tool operation sequence number) (*low–speed response) (not
Window function description (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB), 1449 available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1265
Window function description (FS16/16i/0i–P), 1484 Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter type), 1435

Window function description (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6), 1368 Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter type) (*low–
speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
Window function description (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/ 21–TA), 1261
SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4),1142
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter), 1435
WINDR (reading CNC window data), 299
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter) (*low–
WINDW (writing CNC window data), 302 speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1259
Writing (registering) tool life management data (tool group number)
(*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series Writing the tool life management data (tool life), 1434
21–TA), 1291
Writing the tool life management data (tool life) (*low–speed re-
Writing a custom macro variable, 1431 sponse) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1257
Writing a custom macro variable (*low–speed response), 1169 Writing the tool life management data (tool number), 1439
Writing a data on the program check screen, 1432 Writing the tool life management data (tool number) (*low–speed
response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1275
Writing a parameter (*low–speed response), 1160
Writing the tool management data (tool condition (2) : tool operation
Writing a parameter (setting data), 1430 sequence number) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power
Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1273
Writing a tool management data (*low–speed response), 1349
Writing the tool offset data according to the specified tool number,
Writing a tool offset (*Low–speed response), 1152 1440
Writing a tool offset data, 1429 Writing the torque limit override, 1433
Writing a workpiece origin offset value (*low–speed response) (not Writing the wire diameter offset (*low–speed response), 1462
supported by the Power Mate–D or –F), 1156
Writing tool life management data (cutter compemsation number 1),
Writing each tool data (*low–speed response), 1360 1446

i–10
B–61863E/15 Index

Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later

Writing tool life management data (tool group numbers), 1444 Writing, reading, and comparing sequence programs and PMC pa-
rameters, 778
Writing tool life management data (tool information 1), 1447
Writing, reading, and verifying the sequence program and PMC
Writing tool life management data (tool information 1) (*low–speed parameter data, 566
response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 210TA), 1298
WRT, 126
Writing tool life management data (tool length compensation number
1), 1445 WRT. NOT, 127
Writing tool life management data (tool length offset number 1)
(*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1294
Writing tool life management data (tool radius offset number 1) ƠXơ
(*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1296 XMOV (indexed data transfer), 239
Writing value of the P–code macro variable (*low–speed response), XMOVB (binary index modifier data transfer), 242
1251

i–11




 




        ! " 
 # #$

#
%#  " & $

'  ()*+! 

,- &. 


 ! "

 # $% & & &#& 
'+ /
()*+  -0.
%% $!!'
($
!$))
$ &!%

!$*&$$
(


&))
(&
($
)

 $
 
$!!
($
%! )
+#& !$(! $$'%$




,
!-./01234
!
5./5036 $




,
!-./0123-4
!
5./503-6 7$78#7
'&  -()*+

    !7/$$  $)
+!&!$%'$!+!$
 $ 
 (

( & & # $!&) #
$

$
 ,
!-6 8!%
9
$978
%:8
;
'! ,
()*+   :)''
:,<) 6!78$= 
,<) 6

%,<) 6>
%
,<) 6%
%
'  ()*+ 

,-&. ,<) 6 

%
,<) 6>$78%,<)
-0.

 6!78
%,<)
6!8
%,<)
-0-203345 ,,6( 6:=
!55?25
%$)
7408 -
,-" . $

 #

)+ #

' /1)*+ 7408 -
,-" .7$ $>$$!5
%$)

%$>$$
7408 -
,-"  $ !5
%$)

%
 

 8,,39-/
1 6,3//- 0

5
/995

' 85()*+ -0.  


(  ;83()'' -0.!

 -03/
,3/1-508 -0
. 
 - 0 6,/ 0 % < ,- 0
 
 &
' /
()*+ -0.


  /1)'''  - 0 44 08 - "-3 30 9//59- 
08 -/0
-2$
 

 -0



33,/5/

(
' 85()*+  /
()*++ -0. 
.
/(

'  -()*+'   ()*+& -04

/-

-

/- -- - /- --
• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.